ENGLISH 


GRAMMAR. 


PUBLISHED  BY  ORDER  Uh' 


lE^Hc^  i2Bs:sc£^i^i2ai:^5:ss3rci^'^2"fi>  \ 


HENRY  W.  ALLEN, 

GOVERNOR  OF  LOUISIANA. 


SHREVEPORT,  Li: 

LVTED  AT  THB  O^'FICE  OF  THE  SOUTH- WESTERN. 
1866. 


i 


THE 

WILLIAM  R.  PERKINS 

LIBRARY 

OF 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY 


-v^    \     W'  ^"^ 


» 


J^  stE  i<  iH'^^^a.  IM  i 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


PUBLISHED  BY  ORDER  OF 

HENRY  W.  ALLEN, 

GOVERNOR  OF  LOUISIANA. 


SHREVEPORT,  La: 
PRINTED  AT  THE  OFFICE  OF  THE  SOUTH-WESTERN. 

1865. 


/ 


PREFACE. 

This  Grammar  is  compiled  from  the  "New  English 
Grammar"  of  Roswell  C.  Smith,  whose  elementary  school 
books  have  become  so  deservedly  popular.  The  style  of 
instruction  herein  taught,  is  called  the  "Productive  System," 
and  is  eminently  adapted  to  beginners  and  children  of  ten- 
der years.  It  is  published  by  order  of  his  Excellency,  the 
Governor  of  Louisiana. 

Sheeveport,  La.,  1865. 


I.  OF  THE  NOUN. 

Q.    What  is  your  name  V 

Q.    What  is  the  name  of  the  town  in  which  you  live  ? 

Q.    What  does  the  word  noun  mean  ? 

Ans.     The  word  noun  means  name. 

Q.    What,  then,  may  your  name  be  called  ? 

1.  A  NOUN. 

Q.    What  may  all  names  be  called? 

2.  Nouns. 

Q.    Shrevejoort  is  the  name  of  a  place  :   is  Sh'eveport  a  noun  ?  and  if  so,  why? 

3.  Shreveport  is  a  noun,  because  it  is  a  name. 

Q.    Potoinac  is  the  name  of  a  river  :  is  Potomac  a  noun,  and  why  ? 

Q.    Book  is  the  name  of  something  to  read  in  :   is  hooh  a  noun,  and  why  ? 

Q.    Will  you  inform  me  what  a  noun  is  ? 

4.  A  noun  is  the  name  of  any  person,  place,  or  thing. 

Q.  Will  you  mention  two  nouns,  the  names  of  persons?  two,  the  names  of 
things?  two,  the  names  of  different  places? 

Q.  Will  you  tell  me  which  words  are  nouns  in  the  following  sentences,  as  I 
read  them  to  j'ou  ? 

*'  Thomas  and  Joseph  are  in  the  house." 

"The  horse  and  cow  are  in  the  lot." 

"The  hawk  and  the  eagle  have  flown  to  the  mountain." 

*'  Trees,  corn,  potatoes  and  apples  grow  in  the  fields." 


II.  NUMBER. 

Q.    What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  number;  as,  "  The  number  of  buttons 
on  your  coat?" 

5.  Number  means  one  or  more. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  singular  mean  ? 

6.  It  means  one. 

Q.    When,  then,  I  speak  of  one  thing  only,  as  chair,  what  number  is  it? 

7.  Singular  number. 

Q.    What,  then,, does  the  singular  number  of  nouns  denote ? 

8.  The  singular  number  denotes  but  one  thing. 

Q.     Of  what  number  is  b')ol\  and  why  ? 


4  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR 

9.  Book  is  of  the  singular  number,  because  it  means  but 
one. 

Q.     Of  what  number  is  clt<rir,  and  why  f 
Q.     AYhat  does  the  word  j)laral  mean  ? 

10.  It  means  7}iore  than  one. 

Q.     Of  what  number  is  lam_ps,  and  why  ? 

11.  Lamps  is  of  the  plural  number,  because   it   means 
more  than  one. 

Q.     Of  What  number  is  inkstand,  and  why  ? 

Q.    By  addino-  .s'  to  doif,  we  have  dov€-s,'aud  es  to  box,  we  have  loxes.    How, 
then,  is  the  plural  of  nouns  usually  formed  V 

12.  By  adding  s  or  es  to  the  singular. 

Q.    Will  you  spell  the  plural  of  ounceff  glass?  icindow?  theatre?  antecedent?' 
church?  labyrinth/ 

Q.     How  many  numbers  do  nouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

13.  Two,  the  singular  and  plural. 

Q.     Will  you  name  a  noun  of  the  singular  number  ?  one  of  the  plural  number? 


III.  GENDER. 

Q.    What  does  the  word /7e«(f^;' mean? 

14.  Gender  signifies  sex. 

Q,    What  does  the  word  masculine  mean? 

15.  It  means  male. 

Q.    Joh,n  is  the  name  of  a  male :   of  what  gender  or  sex,  then,  is  John  ? 

16.  Of  the  male  or  musculine  gender. 

Q.    What  nouns,  then,  are  said  to  be  of  the  masculine  gender? 

17.  The  names  of.  males. 

Q.    What  gender,  then,  is  man,  and  why  ? 

18.  Man  is  of  the  masculine  gendei*,  because  it  is  the 
name  of  a  male. 

Q.     Of  what  gender  is  uncle,  and  why  ?  father  ?  why  ? 
Q.    What  do&^feminine  mean  ? 

19.  It  means  female. 

Q.    Susan  is  the  name  of  a  female  :  of  what  gender,  then,  is  Stotan  ? 

20.  Of  the  feminine  gender. 

Q.    What  nouns,  then,  are  said  to  be  of  the  feminine  gender? 

21.  The  names  of  females. 

Q.    What  gender  is  womaTi,  and  why? 

22.  Woman  is  of  the  feminine  gender,  because  it  is  the 
name  of  a  female. 

Q.     Of  what  gender  is  aunt,  and  why?  daughter?  why? 
Q.  What  does  the  word  neuter  mean  ? 

^3.  It  means  neither. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  5 

Q.  Chair  is  the  name  neither  of  a  male  uov  a  female  :  what  gendei',  then,  may 
it  properly  be  called? 

24.  Neuter  gender. 

Q.    What  nouns,  then,  may  be  gaid  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender? 

25.  The  names  of  objects  that  are  neither  males  nor  fe- 
males. 

Q.     Of  what  gender  is  inksland,  and  why  ? 

26.  Neuter  gender,  because  it  is  the  name  neither  of  a 
male  nor  female. 

Q.     Of  what  gender  is  i<?«t'A/  why?  chair?  why? 

Q.  Parent^  y"ou  know,  is  the  name  either  of  father  or  mother,  that  is,  it  is  a 
name  c07Jimoii  to  both :  of  what  gender,  then,  shall  we  call  such  nouns  tksparmt, 
bird,  kc.  ? 

27.  Common  gender. 

Q    What  nouns,  then,  may  be  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender? 

28.  The  names  of  such  animals  as  may  be  either  males 
or  females. 

Q.     Of  what  gender  is  sheej),  and  why? 

29.  Sheep  is  of  the  common  gender,  because  it  is  the  name 
either  of  a  male' or  female. 

Q.    Of  what  gender  is  roUn,  and  why? 

Q.     How  many  genders  do  nouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they? 

30.  Four — the  masculine,  the  feminine,  the  neuter,  and 
the  common. 

Q.  Will  you  name  a  noun  of  the  masculine  gender?  one  of  the  feminine?  one 
of  the  neuter?  one  of  the  common? 

Q.  Will  you  name  the  gender  and  number  of  each  noun  in  the  following  sen- 
tences, as  I  read  them  to  you  ? 

"James  and  William."  "Slate  and  pencil." 

"John  and  the  sfirls."  "  Women  and  bii'ds." 


IV.  PROPER  AND  COMMON  NOUNS. 

Q.    What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  common;  as,  "A  common  complaint?" 

3 1 .  Common  m  ea^ns  general. 

Q.    Although  there  are  many  male  children  in  the  world;  each  one  may  be 
called  by  the  general  name  of  hoy :  what  kind  of  a  noun,  then,  would  you  call 

b07J? 

32.  A  common  noun. 

Q.    When,  then,  is  a  noun  called  common? 

33.  When  it  is  a  general  name. 

Q.    What  does  the  yvovdi  proper  mean  ? 

34.  It  means  fit  or  pai^ticular. 

Q.    Jofin,  you  know,  is  the  particular  name  of  a  boy  ;  what  kind  of  a  noun> 
then,  mav  it  be  called  ? 


6  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

35.  A  proper  noun. 

Q.    "WTieu,  then,  may  a  noun  be  called  proper? 

36.  Wlien  it.  is  a  particular  name. 

Q.  What  kind  of  a  noun  is  Susan,  and  why  ? 

37.  Susan  is  a  proper  noun,  be'^ause  it  is  a  particular 
name. 

Q.    What  kind  of  a  noun  is  John,  and  why  ? 
Q.     What  kind  of  a  noun  is  river,  and  why  V 

38.  Rivc7^  is  a  common  noun,  because  it  is  a  general 
name. 

Q.     How  nip-ny  kinds  of  nouns  do  there  appear  to  be,  and  what  are  they? 

Q.  What  kiui  of  a  notin  is  yi>&.^  Ma't'y?'town?  llichmond?  London?  hoat? 
chain ? 

Q  Will  you  now  tell  me  which  words  are  the  nouns  in  the  following  sentences; 
which  are  proper,  and  which  are  common;  also  their  gender  and  number? 

*'  Thomas  and  John."  "  King  and  queen." 

"Susan  and  Mary."  "  House  and  barn." 


y.  PERSON. 

Q.     When  a  person,  ia  speaking,  says,  "  I,  John,  will  do  it,"  what  person  do 
grammarians  call  John  ? 

39.  The  first  person. 

Q.    When,  then,  is  a  noun  of  the  first  person  ? 

40    When  it  is  the  name  of  the  person  speaking. 

Q,     When  I  say,  "  James,  mind  your  studies,"  what  do  grammarians  call 
James? 

The  second  person,  being  the  person  spoken  to. 

When,  then,  is  a  noun  of  the  second  person  ? 

42.  When  it  is  the  name  of  the    person  spoken    to,  or 
addressed. 

Q.    "  William,  James  has  come."    What  person  is  TFiZ^ia?/i,  and  why? 

43.  Of  the  second  person,  because  William  is  spoken  to. 

Q.     When  I  say,  "  William,  James  has  come,"  I  am  speaking  to  WilUam 
about  James  :  of  what  person,  then,  is  James,  and  why  ? 

44.  Of  the  third  person,  because  James  was  spoken  of; 
that  is,  I  was  talking  about  James. 

Q.    When,  then,  is  a  noun  of  the  third  person? 

45.  When  it  is  spoken  of. 

Q.     **  Thomas,  Rufus  is  in  the  garden."    What  person  is  Thomas?  why?    I* 
Evfus?  why? 

Q.    How  many  persons  do  nouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

48.  Three  persons — the  first,  second,  and  third. 

Q.    Will  you  inform  me  which  of  the  following  nouns  are  proper,  which  com" 
men;  ala*  their  gender,  number,  and  person? 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

"I,  James,  of  Richmond."       "Boy  and  girl." 

"  Henry,  study  your  book."     "  William  and  his  sister 


VI.  CASE. 

Q.  We  say  of  an  animal,  for  instance  a  horse,  when  he  is  fat,  that  "  He  is  in 
a  good  case  ;"'  and,  when  he  is  lean,  that  "  He  is  in  a  bad  case  ;"  what,  there- 
f«re,  does  the  word  case  mean  ? 

47.  Case  means  condition,  stnte,  &c. 

Q.  When  I  say  "Charles  strikes  William,"  "  William  strikes  Charles,"  you 
may  perceive  that  the  state  or  condition  of  Charles  in  the  fomcr  example  is 
quite  diffeient  from  his  state  or  condition  in  the  latter:  in  the  one,  Charles 
strikes  ;  in  the  other,  he  is  struck  ;  what,  then,  )s  meant  by  the  difi'erent  cases  of 
nouns. 

48.  The  different  condition  or  position  they  have  in  rela- 
tion to  other  words  in  the  same  sentence. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  nominaiive  mean  ? 

49.  Nominative  means  naming. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "John  strikes,"  he  evidently  does  something  :  what,  then, 
may  John  be  called  ? 

50.  An  actor  or  doer. 

Q.  Well,  then,  as  the  actor  or  doer  is  considered  the  naming  or  leading  noun, 
in  what  case  is  John,  when  I  say,  "  John  strikes  ?" 

51.  In  the  nominative  case. 

Q.    What,  then,  is  the  nominative  case  of  nouns  ? 

52.  The  nominative  case  is  the  agent  or  doer. 

Q.    When  I  say,  "  The  dog  runs,"  in  what  case  is  dog,  and  why  ? 

53.  Dog  is  in  the  nominative  case,  because  it  is  the  agent, 
actor,  or  doer. 

Q.     '•  The  cat  catches  mice."     In  what  case  is  cat,  and  why  ? 
Q.    When  I   say,  "  Thomas  is  pursuing  the  thief,"  what  is  the  object  here 
which  Thomas  is  pursuing? 

54.  Thief. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  objective  mean  ? 

55.  It  means  belonging  to  the  object. 

Q.  In  what  case,  then,  may  thief  be  reckoned,  in  the  phrase,  "  Thomas  pur- 
sues the  thief?" 

56.  In  the  objective  case. 

Q.    What,  then,  does  the  objective  case  denote  ? 

57.  The  objective  case  denotes  the  object. 

Q.    When  I  say,  "  William  whips  John,"  in  what  case  is  John,  and  why  ? 

58.  In  the  objective  case,  becauj^e  John  is  the  object. 

Q.    What  does  the  y^ord.  possessive  imply  ? 

59.  Possession,  ownership,  property,   &c. 


8  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

Q.     Wlien  I  say,  "  It  is  John's  slate,"  I  mean  to  say  that  Johu  owus  the  slate: 
in  what  case,  then,  shall  we  reckon  JoliiCs? 

60.  In  the  possessive  case. 

Q.    What,  then,  doos  the  possc^ive  case  of  nouns  denote  ? 

61.  The  possessive  case  denotes  possession,  property,  &c. 

Q.     When  I  say,  "  Peter's  knife,"  who  owns  or  possesses  the  knife? 
Q.     In  what  case,  then,  is  Ptttr's^  and  why  '? 

62.  In  the  possessive  case,  because  Peter  possesses  the 
knife. 

Q.    In  the  example  "  .John's  slate,"  you  perceive  that  JolirCs  ends  in  .«,  with  a 
comma  before  it :  what  is  the  comma,  and  what  is  the  ,*,  called  in  grammar? 

63.  The  comma  is  called  an  apostrophe,  and  the  s,  an 
apostrophic  5. 

Q.     You  also  perceive  that  John's  is  singular  :  how,  then,  do  nouns  in  the  sin- 
gular number  usually  form  their  possessive  case  ? 

64.  By  taking  after  them  an  apostrophe  with  the  letter  s 
following  it. 

Q.     "  On  eagles'  wings."    Here  ea<^les'  is  plural,  and  in  the  possessive  case  : 
how,  then,  do  nouns  in  the  plural  usually  form  their  possessive  case  ? 

65.  Simply  by  taking  the  apostrophe  without  the  addition 

of  5. 

Q.    But  if  the  plural  does  not  end  in  s,  as,  "men's  concerns,"  how  is  the  pos- 
sessive case  formed  ? 

QQ.  As  the  same  case  in  the  singular  number  is  formed. 

Q.    From  the  foregoing  remarks,  how  many  cases  do  nouns  appear  to  have, 
and  what  are  they? 

67.  Three — the  nominative,  possessive,  and  objective. 

Q.    Decline  sometimes  means  to  vary  tJie  ending  of  a  word :  what,  then,  do  I 
mean  when  I  ask  you  to  decline  a  noun  ? 

68.  To  tell  its  different  cases  or  endings. 

Q.     Will  you  decline  f/oA7^? 

69.  Noininative  case,         John. 
Possessive  case,  John's. 

Objective  case,  John. 

Q.    Will  you  decline  ^^oy,  in  both  numbers? 

Singular.  Plural. 

70.  Nom.  Boy.  Norn.  Boys. 

Poss.  Boy's.  Poss.  Boys'. 

Ohj.    Boy.  Ohj.     Boys. 

Q.     When  I  say,  "  WiJliam's  coat,"  you  perceive  that  the  noun  cooi  follows 
William's  :  by  what  is  William's  said  to  be  governed,  and  why? 

71.  By  coat,  because  it  follows  William^s. 

Q.    What,  then,  may  be  considered  a  rule  for  governing  the  possessive  case  ? 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  9 

RULE  I. 

The  possessive  case  is  governed  hy  the  following  noun. 

Q.     "  William's  hat."    Is  WiUiam''s  a  proper  or  common  noun  ♦  Why  ?  (36.)* 
Q.     What  is  its  person?  why?  (45.)*     Its  number  ?  why  ?  (^.')*     Its  gender? 
Why?   (17.)*    Its  case?     why?   (61.)*    What  noun  follows   William's?    What 
word,  then,  governs  WiUiara's  ?    What  is  the  rule  ? 

Q.  When  we  mention  the  several  properties  of  the  different  words  in  sen- 
tences, in  the  same  manner  as  we  have  those  of  William's,  above,  what  i»  th« 
exercise  called? 

72.  Parsing. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
*' John's  knife:' 

73.  John's  is  a  noun,  because  it  is  a  name — proper,  be- 
cause it  is  a  particular  name — mas^culine  gender  ;  it  is  the 
name  of  a  male — third  person  ;  it  is  spoken  o1^ — i»iNGULAR 
NUMBER  ;  it  means  but  one — possessive  ca.si;  ;  it  implies  pos- 
session— and  is  governed  by  the  noun  knife,  according  to 

Rule  I.  The  possessive  case  is  governed  hy  the  following 
noun. 

Knife  is  a  noun  ;  it  is  a  name — common  ;  it  is  a  general 
name — netjter  gender  ;  it  is  neither  male  nor  female — 
THIRD  PEksoN  ;  it  is  spoken  of — singular  number  ;  it  means 
but  one. 

^^  Let  the  learner  parse  the  forgoing ^  till  the.  mode  of  parsing  the  noun  is 
so  familiar  to  him,  that  he  can  do  it  readily,  ivithout  looking  in  the  book.  He  may 
then  take  the  folloicing  exercises,  xvhich  are  to  he  parsed  in  a  similar  manner. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 

"  Peter's  cap."  "  Stephen's  coat."  "  Brother's  koife." 

*'  John's  slate."  "  Father's  house."  "  Boys'  hats." 


VII.   OF   ARTICLES. 

Q.     When  I  say,  "  Give  me  a  book,"  I  evidently  mean  no  particular  book,  but 
when  I  say,  "  Give  me  the  book,"  what  do  I  mean? 

.74.  Some  particular  book. 

Q.    Which  are  the  words  that  make  this  difference  in  meaning? 

75.  A  and  the. 

Q.     What  are  these  little  word.?  called? 

76.  Articles. 

Q.    What,  then,  are  articles? 


*  Rsfor  hack  to  Ihis  numbtr 


10  EHSF0L18H  GRAMMAR. 

77.  Articles  are  words  placed  before  nouns  to  limit  their 
meaning. 

Q,     What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  definite  ? 

78.  Definite  means  particular. 

Q.  "  Give  me  the  book."  Here  a  particular  book  is  referred  to  :  what  kind 
«f  »u  article,  then,  shall  we  call  the  / 

79.  Definite  article. 

Q.     Whiit,  then,  is  a  definite  article? 

80.  It  points  out  what  particular  thing  or  things  are 
meant. 

Q.  The  word  in,  when  placed  before  words,  frcquenly  signifies  ncf :  what, 
then,  will  inJejinite  mean  ? 

81.  Not  definite. 

Q.  When  I  saj',  "  Give  me  a  knife,"  no  particular  knife  is  meant :  what  kind 
of  an  article,  then,  maj  a  be  called? 

82.  Indefinite   article. 

Q.    Why  is  it  so  called  ? 

83.  Because  it  is  not  used  before  the  name  of  any  par- 
ticular person  or  thing. 

Q.  We  say,  "  an  apple,"  "  an  inkstand,"  kc.  in  preference  to  "  a  apple,"  "  a 
nkstand,"  &c.  :  why  is  this? 

84.  Because  it  is  easier  to  speak,  and  also  more  pleasant 
to  the  ear. 

Q.    What  kind  of  letters  do  appl"  and  inJcsiand  begin  with  ? 

85.  Vowels. 

Q.     In  what  cases  do  we  use  an  instead  of  a? 

86.  Before  Avords  beginning  with  the  vowels  a,  p.  i^Oy  u. 

Q.     In  speaking,  we  say,  "  a  man,"  not  **  an  man  :"  when,  then,  do  we  use  «? 

87.  Before  words  beginning  with  consonants. 

Q.     Which  letters  are  consonants  ? 

88.  All  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  except  the  vowels, 
which  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u  ;  and  also  w  and  y,  except  at  the  be- 
ginning of  words,  when  they  are  consonants. 

Q.    How,  then,  do  a  and  an  differ  ? 

89.  Only  in  their  use  ;  a  being  used  before  consonants, 
and  an  before  vowels :  both  are  called  by  the  same  name. 

Q.     How  many  articles  do  there  appear  to  be,  and  what  are  they  * 

90.  Two — a  or  an,  and  iiie 

Q.  It  is  customary  to  say,  "  a  boy,"  not  "  a  hoyg  f^  also,  "  an  inkstand,"  not 
'*  an  inhiand^y  of  what  number,  then,  must  the  noun  be,  before  which  the  ip- 
dcOnite  artkile  is  placed? 

91.  Th<5  singular  number. 

Q.     What,  thea,  is  th«  rc^e  i'or  tbe  iDdefrKt«  ai'ti«4« 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  U 

RULE   II. 

The  indefinite  article  a  or  an  belongs  to  nouns  of  the  singular 

number. 

Q.  \Vo  can  say,  "  the  bov,"  and  "  the  boys  ;"  using  a  noun  either  of  the  sin- 
gular or  plural  number  after VAe  /  what  then,  is  the  rule  for  the  definite  article? 

RULE   III.       . 

The  definite  article  the  belongs  to  nouns  in  the  singular  •r 

plural  number. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

""The   boyr 

92.   The  is  an  article,  a  word  placed   before  nouns  to 

limit  their  meaning — definite;  it  means  a  particular  boy — 

and  belongs  to  hoy,  according  to 

Rule  III.  The  definite  article  the  belongs  to  nouns  of  the 
singular  or  plural  number. 

Boy  is  a  noun  ;  it  is  a  name — common  ;  it  is  a  general 
name — masculine  gender;  it  is  the  name  of  a  male — third 
PERSON  ;  it  is  spoken  of — and  singular  number  ;  it  means 
but  one. 

EXERCISES   IN    PARSING   CONTINUSK. 

"A  hand."  "An  eagle."  '"The  man."  "The  boys' bati," 

"A  man."  "An  insect."  "The  men."  "JL  man's  cap." 


VIII.  OP  ADJECTIVES. 

Q.    When  I  say,   "  John  is  an  obedient,  industrious,  and  good  boy,"  I  us* 
certain  words  to  describe  hoy :  whic)!  are  they? 

93.  Industrious,  obedient,  and  good. 

Q.    When  I  say,  "  a  good  man,"  to  what  word  is  the  describing  word  g^ed 
joined  or  added  V 

94.  To  the  noun  man.  i 

Q.     What  does  the  word  adjectivt  mean  ? 

95.  Joined  or  added  to, 

Q.    What,  then,  shall  we  call  such  describiuf  words  as  $004,  tiUdi^nt,  indttt- 
trious,  &'c.  ? 

96.  Adjectives. 

Q.    What,  then,  are  adjectives^ 

97.  Adjectives  are  words  joined  to  nouns  to  describe  or 
qualify  them. 

Q.    *'  A  TTJse  wan."    Whi^  ward  is  I4ia  a^««*ire  b«r«,  a«i  wkjij 


V2  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

Q.  "  Rufus  is  a  good  boy,  but  James  is  a  better  one."  IIow  are  Rufus  and 
James  spoken  of  here  ? 

98.  In  comparison  with  each  other. 

Q.  The  adjectives  in  the  last  example  are  good  and  bitter :  can  you  tell  m^ 
which  of  these  words  denotes  a  higher  degree  of  excellence  than  the  other? 

99.  The  word  better. 

Q.     What  degree  of  (comparison,  then,  shall  we  ca.ll  hettfr  T 

100.  Comparative  degree. 

Q.     What,  then,  does  the  comparative  degree  imply? 

101.  A  comparison  between  two. 

Q.  "  William  is  tall,  Thomas  is  taller,  but  Rufus  is  the  tallest  boy  in  achoel." 
What  is  meant  here  by  tallest? 

102.  Exceeding  all  in  height. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  superlative  mean  ? 

103.  Exceeding  all ;  the  highest  or  lowest  degree. 

Q.     What  degree  of  comparison,  then,  shall  we  call  tallest? 

104.  Superlative  degree. 

Q.    What,  then,  does  the  superlative  degree  do  ? 

105.  It  increases  or  lessens  the  positive  to  the  highest  or 
low^est  degree. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  James  is  a  good  boy,"  I  make  no  comparison  between  him 
and  any  other ;  but  simply  assert  in  a  positive  manner,  that  James  is  a  good  boy. 
What  kind  of  a  sentence,  then,  would  you  call  this? 

106.  A  positive  sentence. 

Q.     Of  what  degree  of  comparison,  then,  shall  we  call  good* 

107.  The  positive  degree 

Q.     What,  then,  does  the  positive  degree  do? 

108.  It  merely  describes,  without  any  comparison. 

Q.    Will  you  compare  great  ? 

109.  "  Po5i7iue,  great ;  Comparative^  greaiter ;  Superlative, 

greatest." 

Q.    Will  you  compare  wise  in  the  same  manner? 

Q.  W'i^e  and  great  are  words  of  one  syllable  :  how,  then,  are  the  comparative 
and  superlative  degrees  of  words  of  this  sort  formed? 

110.  By  adding  r  or  er,  st  or  est,  to  the  positive. 

Q,     Will  you  in  this  manner  compare  S7nall  ?  high  ?  meaii  f 
Q.    Will  you  compare  beautiful? 

111.  "  Pas.  beautiful ;  Comp.  more  beautiful ;  Sup.  most 
beautiful." 

Q.    How  many  syllables  compose  the  word  beautiful  f 

112.  Three. 

Q.  How,  then,  arc  words  of  three,  or  more  syllables  than  one,  usuallj 
fompared  ? 

113.  By  pliicing  more  and  ?7?05i  before  the  positive. 


English  grammar  li 

Q.    Will  you  in  this  manner  cdmpare  indv^friovR  ?  ingeniotis  f  duHj-ul  t 
Q.     Will  you  coiuparc  xclsz,  bj  usiug  the  words  i?ss  and  Uastt 

114    ''  i^o.<?.  wise  ;  Cmivp  less  wise  ;  Sup.  least  wise.'* 

Q.     Will  you  iu  like  manner  compare  henevoUvif  dMinguu'herJf  ?  dilatory  f 
Q.     *'  Good  men,  better  men,  best  men."     Which  {'.djective  here  is  the  pofHive, 
and  why?  (lo3.)    Which  the  comparative?  why?  (ioi.)     Which  the  superlative? 
why  f  (105.)  •  .  "  '         ,.  ■ 

Q.  Good,  you  perceive,  is  not  compared  regularly,  like  greai,  lea-utijul,  &c.  ; 
and  since  there  are  many  v.ords  of  this  descriptiou,  1,  will  give  you  a  list  of  the 
principal  ones,  together  vvilh  others,  regularly  compared :  will  you  repeat  the 
cbr'iparative  and  superlative  degrees,  as  I  name  the  positive? 

115.  Positive.  Coniparaiiv:  Sup€rictiv$. 

Good,  Fetter,  Best, 

Little,  Less,  Least, 

Much,  or  many.         More,  ^Most, 

Bad,  ill,  or  evil,         Worse,  Worst, 

Near,  Nearer,  Nearest,  or  next. 

Old,  Older,  Oldest,  ^r  eldest. 

Late,  Later,  Latest,  or  last. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing,  how  many  degrees  of  comparison  do  there  appear  ta 
be,  and  what  are  they? 

116    Three— the  positive,  comparative,  and  superlative 

Q.  Adjectives,  you  recollect,  describe  nouns  :  to  what,  then,  do  they  naturally 
belong? 

RULE    IV. 

Adjectives  belong  to  the  nouns  which  they  describe. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  A  icisei;  chdd. 
117.   A  is  an  article,  a  word  placed  before  noons  to  limit 
their  meaning  —  indefinite  ;  if,  means  no  particular  child  — 
and  belongs  to  cinld^  agreeably  to 

Rule  II.  The  indefinite  article  a  o?'  an  belongs  to  nouns  of 
the  singula?^  number. 

Wiser  is  an  adjective,  a  word  joined  with  a  noun  to 
describe  it — ''Pos.  wise;  Comp.  wiser;  Sup.  wisest," — maue 
in  the  comparative  degree  —  and  belongs  to  child  by 

Rule  IV.  Adjectives  belong  to  the  nouns  which  they  describe. 

Child  is  a  ^ovs  ;  it  is  a  name  —  common  ;  it  is  a  general 
'name  —  common  gkndkr  ;  it  may  be  either  male  or  female  — 
THIRD  PERSON  ;   it   is  spokcu  of — and   singular  NU>iBER ;  it 
means  but  one. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
1.  2.  3. 

"A  dutiful  son."  "Au  ugly  child."  "The  base  man" 

"An  idle  boy."  *  An  irksome  task."  "The   whiter  cloth." 

'*A  foolish  8on."  •'  A  mild  repiy."  "  Tlw  iml<ier  weather." 


14                    BZsGLLlH  GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 

4.  5. 

*•  The  greatest  man."  "  The  more  (1)  benevolent  citizen." 

"The  wisest  prince."  "  The  most  (1)  suitable  method," 

*' The  noblest  man."  "The  least  (1)  distrustful  Iriend." 

6.  7. 

"A  large,  convenient  and  (1)  "The  last  choice." 

airy  habitation."  "The   bc^t   man." 

"  The  intelligent,  industrious,  "  The  nearest  relations." 

obedient,  and    (1)   docile  "  Johnson's  (2 1  large  dictionary." 

scholar."  "  Murray's  small  grammar." 


IX.  OF  PRONOUNS. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  John  goes  to  school,  John  learns  fast,  and  John  will  excel," 
how  can  I  speak  so  as  to  avoid  repeating  John  so  often? 

IIH.  By  using  the  word  he  in  its  placfi ;  thus,  "John  goes 
to  school,  he  learns  fast,  and  he  will  excel." 

Q.    What  little  word,  then,  may  stand  for  John? 

119.  Re. 

Q.    What  does  the  ^qx^ pronoun  mean  ? 

120.  Standing  for,  or  instead  of,  a  noun, 
Q.    What,  then,  shall  we  call  the  word  he,  above? 

121.  A  PROJJOUN 

Q.     What,  then,  is  a  pronoun? 

122.  A  pronoun  is  a  word  used  for  a  noun,  to  avoid  a 
repetition  of  the  same  word. 

Q.  When  James  says,  "I  will  study,"  you  perceive  that  /  stands  for  tLt 
person  sneaking:  what  person,  then,  is'it?  "(39.) 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  James,  you  must  study,"  the  word  you  evidently  is  applied 
to  James,  who  is  spoken  to  :  what  person,  then  ought  you  to  be? 

123.  The  second  person. 

Q»  When  I  say,  '*  He  (meaning  William)  should  learn,"  what  person  ought 
Tie  to  be  and  why  ? 

124.  The  third  person  ;  because  it  stands  in  the  place  of 
a  noun  which  is  spoken  f».^. 

Q.  If  /  invariably  stands  for  the  first  person,  you  for  the  second,  and  he  for 
the  third,  how  can  we  tell  the  difi'erent  persons  of  pronouns? 

125.  By  the  pronouns  themselves. 

Q.    What  have  these  pronouns  been  called  from  this  circumstance? 

126.  Personal  pronouns. 

5^"  I  will  now  give  you  a  list  of  all  the  personal  pronouns,  which  you  must 
first  examine  carefully,  and  then  answer  such  questions  on  them  as  may  be 
asked  you. 


I.  To  be  omi^ed  in  pansin^f.    i.  Johmori's  ig  governed  by  dictionary ,  b v  .Tlule  I 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


15 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

FIRST    PKE30N. 

127.         Sitig.  Pl^r 


2^om.  \. 

Foss.  My  or  mine. 

Ohj.  Me. 

Sing. 

Kom.  Thou. 

Fqss.  Thy  or  thine. 

Obj.  Thee. 

Sing. 

No7n.  lie. 
Poss.  iiis. 
Ohj.  Him. 

Sing. 

Kom.  She. 

Foss.  llers  or  her, 

{>5;.  Her. 


Sing. 


We. 

Ours  or  eur. 
Ua. 


SBCONP    PEHSON. 


)  )  Koni.  You. 

V   or    >Foss.  Your  or  yours. 

j  )  (9r/;'.  You. 

THIRD    PKUSON    KASCULINR. 


Plur. 

Ye  or  you. 
Your  or  yours. 
You. 


TBIUn    PBEBOX    fBMINIKB. 


TBinO    PERaON   H3UTHR, 


Plur. 

They. 

Theirs  or  their. 

Them. 

Plur, 

They. 

Theirs  or  their. 

Them. 

Plur. 

They. 


Theirs  or  their. 
Them. 


J^x)m.  It. 

Pons.  Its. 

06;.  It. 

Q.    Will  you  decline  /in  both  numbers?  thou  or  yo«  .^  he^  she?  it? 
Q.     In  what  person,  uuuiher,  and  case  is  Z.*"  \oet  my  ?  mine?  our  or  owra.'  7?w/' 
«<«  ;•  iAou .?  yc  ?  his  ?  they  ?  thein  ?  777.7 

Q.    In  what  gender,  person,  number,  and  case  is  he  7  she  ?  it  ?  his  ?  hsrs  1  }i^f 

him  f 

How  many  numbers  do  pronouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

128.  Two — the  singular  and  plural. 

Q.     How  many  cases,  and  what  are  they. 

129.  Three — the  nominative,  the  possessive,  and  the  ob- 
jective. 

Q.     How  many  persons? 

130.  Three — the  first,  second,  and  third. 

Q.    How  many  genders? 

131.  Three — the  masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter. 

Q.     How  many  pronouns  are  there  in  all,  of  the  first  person? 
Q.     How  many  of  the  second,  and  how  many  of  the  third? 
Q.     The  pronouns  of  Uie  uonjinative  case,  singular,  are  called  leading  pro- 
nouns: how  many  of  these  are  there? 

133.  Five — /,  thou  ov you'Jie^  .she,  it. 

Q.  Why  are  not  the  posfcesswtfe-iandobiective  caseB  of  the  singular  and  plural 
numbers,  also  the  nominative  pluiuJ,  reckoned  in  the  number  of  the  l€a(|ing 
pronouns?  "'•  '  ''^'  "  '    •'-"'■■ 

134,  Because  they  are  all  oonmdered  as  varfattoTTs  of  the 
nominative  siwgnltrT.  '  •.  i 


16  EISGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

Q.     To  which  of  the  pronouns  is  it  customarv  to  apply  geiider? 

135    To  the  rhif-d  person  singular,  he,shf\  U. 

Q.  Why  are  not  the  first  and  second  persons  each  made  :  hvays  lo  represent 
,»  diiferent  gender? 

136.  The  first  and  second  persons  being  always  present, 
their  <]:enders  are  supposed  to  be  known. 

Q.  If,  as  we  have  seen,  pronouns  stand  for  nouns,  what  gender,  number,  and 
person  ought  they  to  have? 

137    The  same  as  the  nouns  for  which  the}^  stand. 

Q.     What,  then,  may  be  considered  a  rule  fox"  the  agreement  of  the  pronouns  ? 

RULE  V. 

Pronouns  must  agree  with  the  nouns  for  ivhich  they  stand  in 
gender^  number^  and  ■])erson. 

QUESTIONS  ON  PARSING. 
Q.     How  many  different  sorts  of  words  have  we   now  found,  and  what  are 
they? 

138.  Four — the  Noun,  the  Article,  the  Ajuective  and 
the  Pronoun. 

Q.  The  wor6^ part  you  know,  means  division  ;  and  speech,  the  pmoer  of  luing 
loords,  or  Language  :  what,  therefore,  shall  we  call  these  grand  divisions  of  words? 

139.  Parts  of  Speech. 

Q.  When,  then,  I  ask  you  what  part  of  speech  w^  is,  for  instance,  what  do 
jou  understand  me  to  mean? 

140.  The  same  as  to  ask  me  whether  hoy  is  a  noun  or  not. 

Q.     What  part  of  speech,  then,  is  William,  and  why  ?  (36.) 

1.  *'  He  went  to  school  " 

2.  "  She  went  to  her  task." 

3.  "  William  went  to  his  play." 

4.  "  John  returned  from  his  school." 

5.  *'  I  request  you  to  mind  your  studies." 

6.  "The  book  was  mine,  but  now  it  is  yours.*' 

Q.    Will  you  name  the  pronouns  in  the  six  foregoing  examples? 

Q.     How  many  are  there  in  all? 

Q.  Wluit  is  the  gender,  number,  and  person  of  those  in  the  first?  second? 
third?  fourthV  fifth?  sixth? 

Q.  \\  hat  is  the  gender  ot  his,  in  the  fourth  senteuce?  why?  (137.)  Its  num- 
ber? why  ?  (137.)    Its  person?  why?  (137  )    Its  case  ?  why  ?  (fJl.) 

Q  Will  you  name  the  nouns  in  the  nrst  sentenced  in  the- second?  third? 
fourth?  filth ?  sixth?  -inr:  : 


X.  OF  THE  VERB. 

Q. '  'l^en  I  Bay,  **  James  strikes  Willis^,"  wbicb  word  tells  whet  James  do*s  t 
141.  Strikes. 

^.     7ht>  weH  <!i4^A  m«tmn  tser^ :  unti  a."  the  wdr^s  in  all  8MitcT<»tfff.  w^tii«fi  f4)\ 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.     ^  17 

what  the  nouns  do,  are  the  principal  ones,  what  shall  such  words  be  called? 

142.  Verbs. 

Q.  If,  in  the  phrase,  "William  strikes  James,"  we  leave  out  the  word  stfikts, 
you  perceive  at  once  that  the  sense  is  destroyed  :  what  reason,  then,  can  you  give, 
for  calling  some  words  in  a  sentence  verbs,  and  others  by  a  different  name? 

143.  The  words  which  we  call  verbs  are  the  most  im- 
portant. 

Q.     "William  studies  his  lesson."    Which  word  is  the  verb  here,  and  why? 

144.  Studies,  because  it  tells  what  William  does. 

Q,     When  I  say,  "John  dances,"  which  word  is  the  verb,  and  why? 
Q.    When  I  say,  "James  strikes  John,"  which  word  shows  that  an  action  ig 
performed  ? 

145.  Strikes. 

Q.    What  kind  of  a  verb,  then,  shall  we  call  strike$  7 

.  146.  An  active  verb. 

Q.     What  kind  of  a  verb  is  walks,  in  this  sentence,   "  John  walks,"  and  why  f 

147.  Walks  is  an  active  verb,  because  it  expresses  action. 

Q.  "  He  beat  William."  Which  word  here  is  the  verb  ?  Is  William  an  agent 
or  an  object? 

148.  An  object. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  The  child  walks,"  walks,  it  is  true,  is  an  active  verb,  but 
it  has  no  noun  after  it  for  an  object,  as  heat  has,  in  the  phrase  above ;  neither  can 
ive  supply  one;  for  we  cannot  say,  "  The  child  walks,"  any  thing:  what,  therefore, 
is  to  be  inferred  from  this  fact,  in  regard  to  the  nature  of  active  verbs? 

149.  That  some  .-active  verbs  will  take  nbuns  after  them 
for  objects,  and  others  Vvill  not. 

Q.  We  will  next  notice  this  difference.  The  term  transitive  means  passing 
over  ;  and  when  I  say_,  "  William  whips  Charles,"  the  verb  tvhips  shows  that  the 
action  whicli  William  performs,  ,^;(?.<fS6s  over  to  Charles  as  the  object.  What  Icind 
of  a  verb,  then,  shall  we  call  whips  / 

150.  An  active-transifive  verb. 

Q.    What,  then,  is  an  active-transitive  verb? 

151.  It  is  one  that  either  has,  or  may  have,  azi  object 
after  it. 

Q.  Walks,  we  found,  would  not  take  an  object  after  it;  and,  as  intrantitiv* 
means  not p>ai'sing  over,  what  shall  we  call  such  Verbs  as  walks  i 

152.  Active-intransitive  verbs. 

Q.    What,  then,  is  an  active- intransitive  verb? 

153.  An  active-intrans'iiive  verb  is  one  that  expresses 
action,  but  will  not  t^ke  an  object  affer  it. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  ITe  cats  it,"  "  He  bents  him,"  we  immediately  determine 
that  heats  and  eats  are  active-transitive  verbs  by  the  objects  after  them  :  how,  then,- 
may  transitive  and  intransitive  vcYbs  be  distinguished? 

154.  When  we  can  place  Uiin  or  it  afrer  an}^  active  vprby 
and  make  sense,  it  is  transitive  ;  otherwise,  it  is  intransitive. 


18  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

Q.  "  James  i-emains  at  home  —  sleeps  at  home  —  is  at  home."  "Which  words 
are  the  verbs  hereV 

155.  Remains,  sleeps,  and  is. 

Q.    These  verbs  do  not  imply  action,  like  strikes,  heat-?,  <&c. :  what  do  they  imply? 

156.  Existence,  rest,  or  being,  in  a  certain  state. 

Q.  These  verbs,  and  others  of  similar  character,  have  been  called  neuter 
(signifying  neither)  by  grammarians,  because  they  are  neither  active  nor  passive. 
On  a  future  occasion,  I  will  make  you  fully  acquainted  with  a  passive  verb.  It  is 
sufficient  for  our  present  purpose,' that  you  perceive  the  reason  of  the  name  of 
the  neuter  verb.     What  is  a  neuter  verb  ? 

157.  A  neuter  verb  is  one  that  simply  implies  being  or 
existence  in  a  certain  state. 

Q.  Will  you  inform  me  now,  in  general  terms,  what  is  a  correct  definition  of 
a  verb? 

158.  A  verb  is  a  word  which  signifies  action  or  being. 

Q.    When  I  say,  "  I  strike,"  in  what  number  and  person  is  strike,  and  why? 

159.  Strike,  is  of  the  first  person  singular,  because  its 
agent,  /,  is  of  this  person  and  number. 

Q.  Hence  you  may  perceive,  that  verbs,  in  themselves  considered,  do  not 
have  person  and  number :  why,  then,  are  they  said  to  have  these  properties  at  all  V 

160  On  account  of  the  connection  which  they  have  with 
their  agents  or  nominatives. 

Q.  We  say,  "I  write,"  and  "  He  writes ;"  hence  you  perceive  that  the  end- 
ing of  the  verb  varies,  as  its  agent  or  nominative  varies :  what,  theUj  will  be  the 
rule  for  the  nominative  case? 

RULE    VI. 

The  nominative  case  governs  the  verb  in  number  and  person, 

Q.  If  the  nominative  case  governs  the  verb  in  number  and  person,  in  what 
respect  must  the  verb  agree  with  its  nominative  case  ? 

RULE   VII. 

A  verb  must  agree  with  its  nominative  case  in  number  and 

person. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "James  beats  him,"  the  pronoun  1dm  is  the  object  of  the 
action  denoted  by  heat.^,  and  is,  therefore,  in  the  objective  case :  what,  then,  will 
be  a  good  rule  for  the  objective  case  after  active  verbs? 

RULE    VIII. 

Active-transitive  verbs  govern  the  objective  case. 

Q.  I  will  now  give  you  the  different  endings  of  the  verb  love,  in  its  different 
numbers  and  persons.    Will  you  repeat  them? 

Singular.  .  Plural. 

I'll.     First  pcrnoii.,     I  love.  First  person,     We  love. 

i^econd person.,   You  love  iSVcoTiti^e/w/i,  You  love. 

Tkird  person.  He  loves.  Third  person,   They  love. 

Q.    Will  you  repeat  the  variations  ot  am  ? 


•    ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  /  19 

Singular.  Plural. 

162.  1  Pers.  I  am.  1   Ptvu.  We  are. 

2  Fers.  You  are.  2  Pers.  You  are. 

3  Pers.  He  is.  S  i-ir/6'.  They  are. 

Q.     Will  you  repeat,  in  tlie  samemanner,  the  variations  of  hate  1  desire  ?  read  ? 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  /  Study  my  lesson. ^^ 

163.  /is  a  PRONou?r,  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun — per- 
sonal ;  it  always  denotes  the  same  person,  (the  first) — first 
person;  it  denotes  the  speaker  —  singular  number  ;  it  means 
but  one — "  Nom.  I"— made  in  the  nominative  case  to  study, 
according  to 

Rule  VI.  The  7io?ninative  case  governs  the  verb  in  numher 
and  person. 

Study  is  a  verb  ;  it  expresses  action — transitive  ;  it  admits 
an  object  after  it — '1  Pers.  I  study" — made  in  the  first 
PERSON — singular  NUMBER,  bccausc  its  nomiuatlve  /  is,  Avith 
which  it  agrees,  agreeably  to 

Rule  VII.  A  verb  must  agree  toith  its  nominative  case  in 
number  and  person. 

My  is  a  PRONOUN,  a  word  used  for  a  noun — personal  ;  it 
alwaj'^s  represents  the  same  person — first  person  ;  it  repre- 
sents the  person  speaking- — "  Nom.  I ;  Poss.  my,  or  mine'^ — 
made  in  the  possessive  case — and  governed  b}^  the  noun 
lesson  according  to 

Rule  I.  The  possessive  case  is  governed  by  the  folloiving 
noun. 

Lesson  is  a  noun — common  ;  it  is  a  general  name- — neuter 
gender  ;  it  is  neither  male  nor  female— -third  person  ;  it  is 
spoken  of— -singular  number  ;  it  means  but  one-— and  in  the 
objective  case  ;  it  is  the  object  of  the  verb  study,  and  gov- 
erned by  it,  according  to 

Rule  VIII.  Active-transitive  verbs  govern  the  objective  case. 
EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 

Transitive   Verbs. 

"  I  lament  my  fate."                             '  *'  He  found  a  dollar." 

"  You  regard  your  friends."  "  She  attends  the  school." 

"  We  desire  your  improvement."  "  It  retards  the  work." 

"  We  love  our  childrtsn."  *'  They  shun  vice." 

"  You  make  a  knife."  "  Ye  derive  comfort." 
2. 

"  I  love  him."  ^  "  She  forsook  you," 

"  I  lament  her."  '  "  They  annoy  me." 

"  You  assist  then:."  "  We'took  it." 

"  He  struck  her."  "  She  relieved  ug." 


20  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

''Jolin  reads  his  book" 
His  is  a  pronoum,  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun — per- 
sonal ;  it  unilormly  stands  for  the  same  person — masculine 

GEVDEIs,  THIRD    PERSON,    SINGULAR    NUMBER,    bcCaUSC    the    nOUH 

John  is,  with  which  it  agrees,  agreeabl}'  to 

Rile  V.  Pranouns  must  as[ree  vilh  the  nouns  for  which 
they  stand,  in  gender,  number,  and  person. 

"  Nom.  he  ;  Pass,  his" — made  in  the  possessive  case — 
and  governed  b}^  the  noun  book,  according  to 

Rule  I.  The  possessive  case  is  governed  by  the  following 
noun. 

IJ^"  The  remaiuing  words,  hook,  reads,  and  Jolin,  are  parsed  as  before. 
EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 


*'■  Mary  studies  her  lesson."  "  "Virtue  rewards  its  followers." 

"  The  girls  love  their  books."  "A  disobedient  son  grieves  his  parefits." 

"  Good  children  mind  their  parents."        "  The  intemperate  aiau  loves  his  dram." 
^^In  parsing  personal  pronouns,  we  do  not  apply  Rule  V.  unless  the  nouns 
for  which  they  stand  are  expressed. 

Intransitive  Verbs. 
4. 

"  I  walk."  '*  You  smile."  "  John  swims." 

"  James  run?."  "  They  wink."  "  JJirds  fly." 

"  William  hops."  .  "We  "dance."  "Lions  roar." 

Neuter    Verbs. 

"  William  is  (1.)  discreet."  (2.)  "  John's  wife  is  fortunate." 

"  James  is  happy."  "  John's  brother  is  unhappy." 

"  lie  was  studious."  "  The  eagle's  flight  was  sudden." 

"  He  became  intemperate."  "  The  scholar's  duty  is  plain." 


XL  INDICATIVE  MOOD— TENSE. 

Q.  When  James  says,  "  I  will  learn,"  he  evidently  means,  by  his  manner  of 
speaking,  to  express  his  intention  to  learn;  but  when  he  says,  "I  can  learn," 
what  does  he  mean? 

165.  That  he  has  the  ability  to  learn. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  moo-^  mean? 

166.  Mood  means  manner. 

Q.  What,  then,  does  the  mood  of  verbs  denote  ? 

167.  The  different  manner  of  representing  actions. 


(1.)  7s  is  a  VERB;  it  implies  being — xeuteii;  it  is  neither  active  nor  passive, 
but  expresses  being,  merely — "  1  pei^s.  I  am  ;  2  pei'S.  You  are;  Z pers.  He  o?'  Wil- 
liam is" — made  in  the  third  peuso.v,  singular,  because  \YUliam,  its  nominative, 
it,  and  agrees  with  William.,  according  to 

Rcle'VIII.  a  verb  must  ar/ree  tcith  its  nominative  case  in  number  and/.'^rson. 

(2.)  Discreet  belongs  to  William,  by  Rule  IV. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAH.  21 

Q.     What  does  the  -word  indicative  mean? 

168.  Declaring-  or  showing. 

Q.  Vv'hen  I  say,  "  William  has  studied,"  I  declare  some  fact :  in  what  mood, 
then,  shall  we  class  has  dadied  ? 

169..  Ill  the  indicative  mood. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "Has  William  studied?"  the  only  diifei-ence  between  this 
phrase  and  the  foregoing  consists  in  a  change  in  the  order  of  the  words,  so  as  to 
show  that  a  question  is  asked :  in  what  mood,  then,  shall  we  call  has  William 
ttudied  } 

170.  Indicative  mood. 

Q.     What,  then,  is  the  indicative  mood  used  for  ? 

171.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  for  asserting,  indicating 
or  declaring  a  thing,  or  asking  a  question. 

Q.     In  what  mood  is,  "  They  do  sing?"     Why  ?   (171.) 
().     What  does  the  word  tenae  mean  ? 

172.  Tei}se  means  time. 

Q.     What  does^/'6!.'6/i!i  mean? 

173.  Present  means  now. 

Q.  ^yheu  I  say,  "  The  bird  sings,"  I  mean  that  the  bird  siags  now  :  in  what 
tense,  then,  is  sings  ? 

174.  In  the  present  tense. 

Q.    What,  then,  is  the  present  tense  used  for? 

175.  The  present  tense  is  used  to  express  what  is  now 
taking  place. 

Q.     In  what  tense  is,  "  The  dog  runs  ?"    Why?  (175.) 

Q.  "  James  wrote."  "  James  has  written."  These  phrases  denote  what  it 
pa&t :  in  what  tense  are  they  ? 

176.  In  the  past  tense. 

Q.    What  does  the  word,  future  mean  ;  as,  "At  some  future  time  ?" 

177.  Future  means  yet  to  come. 

Q.     In  what  tense  are  the  phrases,  "  I  will  come,"  "  I  shall  have  come  ?" 

178.  In  the  future  tense. 

Q.     How  many  grand  divisions  of  time  do  there  appear  to  be,  and  what  nv 

ihey  ? 

179.  Three — the  present,  past,  and  future. 

Q.     When  I  say,  "  John  wrote,"  is  the  action  here  spoken  of  past  and  finished? 

180.  It  is. 

Q.     What  does  imperfect  mean  ? 

181.  Unfinished,  or  incomplete. 

Q.  "John  was  writing  when  I  saw  him."  This  denotes  an  action  unfinished 
in  past  time,  and  corresponds  with  what  is  usually  denominated  in  Latin  the  im- 
perfect tense  :  hence  the  origin  of  the  name  selected  by  English  grammarians  to 
denote  action  past  and  finished;  a  term  not  at  all  significant  of  an  actit)n  finished 
in  past  time  :  what,  then,  does  the  imperfect  tense  express  ? 

182.  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  what  took  place  in 
past  time,  however  distant. 


22  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

1j.  "  Peter  wrote  yesterday,  and  has  written  to-day."  Here  both  acts  of 
writing  are  past  and  finished ;  but  which  has  more  immediate  reference  to  the 
present  time  ?       ^ 

183.  Has  written. 

Q.  To  distinguish  this  tense  from  the  imperfect,  grammarians  have  called  it 
the  perfect  tense  :  v.'hat,  then,  will  the  perfect  tense  express? 

184.  The  perfect  tense  expresses  what  has  taken  place, 
and  also  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  present  time. 

Q.  "  James  had  read  before  I  wrote."  Here  bdth  acts  are  past  and  finished; 
which  took  place  first  ? 

185    The  act  of  reading. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  fluiKrfect  mean  ?  / 

186.  More,  than  the  perfect. 

Q.    What  tense,  then,  shall  we  call,  "  James  had  read  ?" 

187.  The  pluperfect  tense. 

Q.    What,  then,  does  the  pluperfect  tense  express? 

188.  The  pluperfect  tense  expresses  what  had  taken 
place  at  or  before  some  past  time  mentioned. 

Q.  "  John  will  come."  This,  you  know,  was  called  the  future  tense  :  can 
you  tell  me  why  V 

189.  Because  it  implies  time  to  come. 

Q.    What,  then,  does  the  future  tense  express? 

190.  The  future  tense  expresses  what  will  take  place 
hereafter. 

Q.  "  I  shall  have  learned  my  lesson  by  noon,"  Here,  an  action  is  to  take 
place  at  a  future  time  specified  or  mentioned  ;  and  since  we  already  have  one 
future  tense,  we  will  call  that  the  first,  and  this  the  second  future  tense :  what, 
then,  will  the  second  future  tense  express? 

191.  The  second  future  expresses  what  will  have  taken 
place  at  or  before  some  future  time  mentioned. 

Q.    What  does  f^yn/jpsis  mean  ? 

192.  A  concue  and  general  view. 

Q.  I  will  now  present  you  with  a  synopsis  of  all  the  difi'erent  tenses,  illus- 
trated by  the  verb  iMrn  :  will  you  repeat  it  V 

SYNOPSIS. 

193.  Pi'is.  tense,  I  learn,  or  do  learn. 

I>np.  tense,  I  learned,  or  did  learn. 

2^erf.  tense,  I  have  learned. 

Plu^).  tense,  I  had  learned. 

1st  Fut.  tense,  I  shall  or  will  learn. 

2d  Fut.  tense,  I  shall  have  learned. 

2^"  You  shall  next  have  the  diflFerent  variations  of  the  foregoing  verb,  in 
each  tense  of  the  indicative  mood  :  these  I  wish  you  to  study  very  carefully,  that 
you  may  be  able  to  answer  the  questions  which  will  then  be  asked  you. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR, 


23 


194. 

To  learn. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT    ', 

PEXSS. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1  Pers.  I  learn. 

1  Pers.  We  learn. 

2 

Fern.  Yon  learn. 

2  Pvrs.  You   learn. 

3  Fei's.  He,  she,  or  it  learns. 

3  Ptrs.  They  learn. 

OR, 

When  we  wish  to  express  energy  or  positiveuess,  thus— 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  do  learn. 

1. 

We  do  learn. 

2. 

You  do  learn. 

2 

.  You  do  learn. 

3. 

He  does  learn. 

3 

.  They  do  learn. 

IMPERFECT 

TENSE. 

Singidar. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  learned. 

1. 

We  learned. 

2. 

You  learned. 

2. 

You  learned. 

3. 

He  learned. 

OR, 

3. 

They  learned. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  did  learn. 

1. 

We  did  learn. 

2. 

You  did  learn. 

2. 

You  did  learn. 

8. 

He  did  learn. 

3. 

They  did  learn. 

PERFECT    TENSK. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  have  learned 

1. 

We  have  learned. 

2. 

You  have  learned. 

2. 

You  have  learned. 

3. 

He  has  learned. 

3. 

They  have  learned. 

PLUPERFECT 

TENSE, 

Singidar. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  had  learned. 

1. 

We  had  learned. 

2. 

You  had  learned. 

0 

You  had  learned. 

3. 

He  had  learned. 

3.' 

They  had  learned. 

FIRST   FUTURE   TEKSI 

!. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  shall  or  will  learn. 

1. 

We  shall  or  will  learn. 

2. 

You  shall  or  will  learn. 

2. 

You  shall  or  will  learn. 

Z. 

He  shall  or  will  learn. 

3.' 

They  shall  or  will  learn. 

SECOND    FUTURE   TENSE. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1. 

I  shall  have  learned. 

1. 

We  shall  have  learned. 

2. 

You  will  have  learned. 

2. 

You  will  have  learned. 

3". 

He  will  have  learned. 

3." 

They  will  have  learned. 

*^*  For  the  benefit  of  those  who  choose  to  retain  the  second  person  singular, 
as  given  in  former  treatises,  the  following  synopsis  is  inserted. 


195.   M  Pers.  Sing.  Pres. 
2d  Pers.  Sing.  Imp. 
U  Rrs.  Sing.  Perf. 
2d  Pers.  Sing.  Plup. 
Id  Pers.  Sing.  1st  Fut. 
2d  Pers.  Sing.  2d.  Fut. 


Thou  learnest  or  dost  learn. 
Thou  learnedst,  or  didst  learn. 
Thou  hast  learned. 
Thou  hadst  learned. 
Thou  shalt  or  wilt  learn. 
Thou  wilt  have  learned. 


Q.    In  what  mood  is,  *'  I  learn  ?"  Why  ?  (171.)    In  what  tense  ?  Why  ?  (175.) 


24  ENGLISH  GRAMMAE. 

In  what  mood  and  tense  is,  "  He  learns  ?"  "  We  learn  ?"  "  I  did  learu  ?"  "  T 
have  learned?"  "I  had  learned  V"  "1  shall  or  will  learn  r"  "I  shall  have 
Uarned  ?" 

Q,  In  what  person  and  number  is,  "  I  learn  ?"  **  You  learn  ?"  "  We  learn  ?" 
"  They  had  learned  V"    "  He  shall  learn  ?"    '*  We  had  learned  ? 

Q. '  What  does  the  word  auxiliaty  mean  V 

1^5.  Auxiliary  means  helping. 

Q.  In  the  phrase,  "  1  will  sing,"  will,  yon  perceive,  is  used  to  help  form  the 
future  tense  of  .vim/ .•  Wi/Hs,  therefore,  called  an  auxiliary  verb,  and  the  verb 
sing  is  reckoned  the  principal  verb  :  what,  then,  are  auxiliary  verbs? 

197.  Anxiliaiy  verbs  are  those  by  the  help  of  which  are 
formed  the  diiTerent  tenses,  moods,  &c.,  of  the  principal  verbs. 

Q.  The  auxiliary  verbs  are  not  unfre([uently  denominated  the  signs  of  the 
tenses,  because  each  tense  has,  in  general,  an  auxiliary  peculiar  to  itself:  what, 
then,  is  the  sign  of  the  second  future? 

198.  Shall  or  will  have. 

Q.     Vrhat  is  the  sign  .of  the  first  future  ? 

199.  Shall  or  will. 

Q.     What  is  the  sign  of  the  pluperfect? 

200.  Had. 

Q.    What  is  the  sign  of  the  perfect? 

201.  Have. 

Q.    What  is  the  sign  of  the  imperfect  ? 

202.  Did. 

Q.  We  can  say,  "I  did  strike  yesterday,"  or,  "  I  struck  yesterday?"  how, 
then,  can  we  tell  when  a  verb  is  in  the  imperfect  tense  without  the  sign  did  ? 

203.  If  we  can  place  yesterday  after  the  verb,  and  make 
sense,  it  is  in  the  imperfect  tense. 

Q.    What  is  the  sign  of  the  present  tense  ? 

204.  Do,  or  the  first  form  of  the  verb. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing,  how  many  tenses  does  the  indicati .  e  mood  appear  to 
have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

205.  Six— -the  present,  the  imperfect,  the  perfect,  the 
pluperfect,  the  first  and  second  future  tenses. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
**  They  have  arrivcd.^^ 

206.  They  is  a  pronoun,  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun---* 
personal;  it  always  represents  the  same  person-— tiiird 
PERSON  ;  it  denotes  the  person  spoken  of — plural  ;  it  means 
more  than  one — "Norn-  he;  Pass,  his:  Ohj.  him  ;  Plural 
Norn,  they" — made  in  the  nominative  case  to  hav^  arrived, 
according  to 

Rule  VI.  The  nominative  case  governs  the  wrh. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  25 

Have  arrived  is  a  verb,  a  word  that  implies  actiun  or 
being — active;  it  implies  action — intransitive;  it  does  not 
admit  of  antobject — indicative  mood;  it  simpl}^  indicates  or 
declares  a  thing — perfect  tense  ;  it  expresses  what  has  just 
taken  place — '"  1.  I  have  arrived  ;  2.  You  have  arrived  ;  3. 
He  has  arrived.  Plural,  1.  We  have  arrived;  2.  You 
have  arrived  ;  3.  They  have  arrived" — made  in  the  third 
person  plural,  because  its  nominative  they  is,  and  agrees 
with  it,  according  to 

Rule  VII.  ^4  verb  must  agree  with  its  nominative  case  in 
number  and  person. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 


They  had  come/'  "  The  sun  has  risen." 

We  did  go."  "  Dogs  will  fight." 

The  bird  will  return."  "  Lions  will  roar." 

2. 

James  loves  William."  "  Columbus  discovered  America." 

Susan  beats  him."  "  Piety  promotes  our  happiness." 

I  have  beaten  them."  "  He  will  learn  his  lesson.  ' 

She  had  beaten  us."  "  John  did  make  great  progress." 

You  shall  assist  him."  "  They  do  study  their  lessons." 

It  did  disturb  me."  "  Boys  love  sport." 

3. 

■  Do  I  disturb  you?"  "  Shall  I  expect  your  assistance. 

Did  they  learii  their  lessons?"  "Will  a  virtuous  citizen  commit  such 
'  Have  they  recited  ?"  (l.)acts?" 

•  Does  the  instructor  teach  us?"  "  Have  you  found  your  knife?" 


XIL  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

Q.     What  does,  *'  He  may  write,"  imply  ? 

207.  Permission  or  liberty  to  write, 

Q.     What  does,  "  He  must  write,"  imply  ? 

208.  Necessity  of  writing. 

Q.    What  does,  "  He  can  write,"  imply? 

209.  Power  or  ability  to  write. 

Q.    What  does,  "  He  should  write,"  imply? 

110.  Duty  or  obligation  to  write. 

Q.    What  does,  "He  would  write,"  imply  ? 

211.  Will  or  inclination  to  write. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  potential  mean  ? 

212.  Able,  or  powerful. 


(1.)  Adjective 


26  ENGLISH  GRAMIMAR. 

Q.  Tq  wliat  mood,  then,  do  giamniaiiaus  reckon  can  learn,  miy  ivritt,  and, 
also,  nnst  write,^  thc.uld  write,  Ac.*? 

213.  In  the  potential  mood. 

Q.  Why  are  fill  these  diiferent  forms  of  ropresenliutr  actions  considered  to 
be  in  the  potentiul  mood,  a  narne,  as  we. have  seen,  peculiar  only  to  that  form  •!* 
the  verb  which  iniplies  power'? 

214.  To  prevent  multiplying  moods  to  a  great  and  almost 
numberless  exieiit. 

Q.     What,  then,  does  the  potential  mood  imply  ? 

215.  The  potential  mood  implies  possibility,  liberty,  power, 
v/ill,  obligacioD,  or  necessity. 

Q.    What  are  the  signs  of  this  mood? 

216.  May^  can,  must,  might,  could,  would,  and  should, 

Q.    What  docs  the  word  conjugation  mean  ? 

217.  Uniting,  combining,  or  joining  together. 

Q.  You  recollect  that,  in  raryiug  the  verb,  we  joined  the  pronouns  with  it'; 
hence,  this  exercise  is  called  conjxi^acio^i :  Vv'hut,  then,  do  yoa  understand  by  the 
conjugation  of  a  verb  ? 

218i  The  conjugation  oF  a  verb  is  the  regular  combina- 
tion and  arrptUgement  of  its  several  moods,  tenses,  numbers, 
and  penrons. 

219.   CoiyjugcUion  of  the  vci^h  Learn. 
POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

IT.USEKT    TEXSK. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  :uay,  can,  or  must  learn.  1.  Vv^e  may,  can,  or  must  learn. 

2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  learn.  2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  learn. 
\i.  He  may,  can,  or  must  learn.  I.  They  may,  can,  or  must  learn. 

IMPERFECT    TtlKSB. 

/Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I    might,    could,  would,  or  should    1.  We  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

learn.  ,  learn. 

2.  You  might,  could,  would,  or  should    2.  You  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

learn.  learn. 

S.  He  might,  could,  would,  or  should  3.  They  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

learn.  learn. 
ncnfECT  ti:nse. 

Si-.iga.'ar.  Plural. 

1.  I  may,  can,  or  must  have  learned,  1.  We  may,  can,  or  must  have  learned. 

2.'  You  may,  can,  or  must  have  learned.  2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  have  learned. 

3.  He  may,  can,  or  must  have  learned.  S.  They  may,  can,  or  must  have  learned 

riA-PEKFECT   TEXSL. 

iL-i:::gnIar.  Plural. 

1.  I    might,    could,    vfould,   or  should    1.  We  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

haye  Isarncd.  have  learned. 

2.  You  might,  could,  would,  or  should    2.  You  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

have  learned.  have  learned. 

S.  He  mi^ht,  could,  v/ould,' or  should    o.  They  might,  could,  would,  cr  should 
have  Jearncd.  have  learned. 


ENG  LIBII  GIIA:vIMA11.  27 

S}jno2}sis  of  the  Second  Person  ^ingiilqr,.  wilh   Tnou. 

Fres.     Thou  mayst,  canst,  or  must  learn. 

Imp.     Thou  niij^hUt,  couldst,  wouklst,  o?-  shouldst  learu. 

Per/.    Thou  mayst,  canst,  or  must  have  Icarued. 

Flup.  Thou  mightst,  cculdst,  wouldst,  or  shouldst  havo  learned. 

Q.    In  what  mood  i3,  "  I  may  learn?*'     Why?  (215.) 

Q.     Will  you  repeat  the  synopsis  with  I?  tJiou  !  he  /  ye  ?  yt  7  yon  7  tl-bcy  1 

Q.  In  what  mood,  tense, 'number,  and  person,  is,  "  I  can  learn  ?"  '*  You  may 
leara  ?"  "  You  might  assist;'"  "  They  could  have  learned?"  "  He  must  study?" 

Q.  In  what  mood  and  tense  is,  "i*  I  have  learned  V"  '*  lie  shall  run  ?"'  "  Wil- 
liam did  sing?"  ■^ 

Q.  Will^you  conjugate  Uarii  ia  the  present  tense,  potential  mood  ?  Will  you 
conjugate /.9i'e  in  the  same  mood,  and  imperfect  tense?  iiirik«y  ia  the  perfect 
tense  ?     Co.ne,  in  the  pluperfect  tense  ? 

^l.     Hovr  many  tense.i  has  the  potential  mood? 

EXERCISES  IN  PAIISIXG. 
"  He  may  return.''' 

221.  Ha  is  a  puono[jr%  a  v/ord  used  instead  of  a  iiouti — 
i'liRsoNAL :  ic  invariably  represents  llie  same  person — MAscir- 
LiNK  GENDER  ;  it  repi'es^.iits  a  male — Tiiir.D  person  ;  it  denotes 
the  person  ripoken  of — singular  numdeh  ;  it  iiPipiies  but  one 
— and  in  tlie  nominative  case  ;  it  denotes  the  agent — "  ISom. 
/jc*" — nominative  ease  to  may  return,  by 

Rule  VI.   'ika  nomuialive  case  governs  the  verb. 

May  return  is  a  verb;  it  implies  action  cr  being — active; 
it  implies  aclior. — intr.ansitive  ;  it  does  not  admit  an  object 
after  it — potential  mood;  it  implies  possibility,  liberty,  &:c. 
— present  tense  ;  it  denotes  v/hai;  may  bo  now — *•  1.  1  may 
67' can  return  ;  2.  You  may  or  can  i-eturn ;  3.  He  raa,y  or 
can  return"- — made  in  tbe  third  person,  singular,  because 
its  nominative  he  is,  v/itH,- which  it  agrees,  according  to 

Rule  YII.  ^1  cerb  r^iast  a^ree  with  Us  nominative  case  in 
number  and  person. 

.EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  COirilNUED. 


'*  He  may  come."  "  Boys  may  learn  arithmetic." 

"  He  might  retire."  "  The  windiiiay  have  shaken  the  trees." 

"  John  can  assist  nic."  .  "The   lady   couid   have   procured  htr 

"  William  must  obey  his  instructor."  fan," 

"  We  mfly  have  erred."  "  Jaaies  may  catch  the  thief." 

**  John's  father  would  go."  "  They  might  Icara." 

2, 

"  I  do  rejoice."  "  The  coramiitee  will  visit  the  school." 

"  We  do  learn."  "  An  idle  boy  will  liud  povtitj." 

"  John  will  resume  his  task."  "  Au  induslrioui  boy  v.'iil  be  rich." 


2S 


ENGLLSIi  GRAMMAR. 


XIII.  CONJUGATION  OF  THE  NEUTER  VERB 
To    be. 

'J22.-  When  I  say,  **  I  am  at  home,"  you  know  that  at/i-  is  a  verb,  because  it 
implies  being  or  existence  ;  and  since  to  be  means  fo  exist,  the  verb  am  has  been 
called  the  verb  fo  be. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD 


223. 


Sinsi/2a} 


Singular 


1.  I  am. 

2.  You  are. 

3.  He  is. 

1.  I  was. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  He  was. 


Singulor. 

1.  I  have  been. 

2.  You  have  been. 

3.  He  had  been. 

Sing7i,lar. 

1.  I  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been. 

3.  He  had  been. 

Singular. 

1.  I  shall  or  will  be. 

2.  You  shall  or  will  be. 
S.  He  shall  or  will  be. 

Singular. 

1.  I  shall  have  been. 

2.  You  will  have  been. 

3.  He  will  have  been. 


Singular. 

1.  I  maj',  can,  or  must  be. 

2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  be 

3.  He  may,  can,  or  must  be. 

Singular. 

1.  I  might,   could,   would, 

be. 

2.  You  might,  could,  would, 

be. 
y..  He  might,  could,  would, 
be. 


PRESEXT    TENSE. 

1.  We  are. 

2.  You  are. 
;3.  They  are. 

IMPERFECT    TENSE. 

1.  We  were. 
•2.  You  were. 

3.  They  were. 

PERFECT    TENSE. 

1.  We  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been. 

3.  They  had  been, 

PLUPERFECT   TENSE. 


Phiral. 


Plvral. 


Plural. 


Plural. 


1.  We  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been. 

3.  They  had  beeu. 

FIRST    FUTURE   TENSE. 

Plural. 

1.  We  shall  or  will  be. 

2.  Y:ou  shall  or  will  be. 

3.  They  shall  or  will  be. 

SECOND  FUTURE   TENSE. 

Plural. 

1.  We  shall  have  been. 

2.  You  will  have  been. 

3.  They  will  have  been. 
POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

Plural. 

1.  We  may,  can,  or  must  be. 

2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  be. 

3.  They  may,  can,  or  must  be. 

IMPERFECT    TENSE. 

Plural, 
or  should    1.  We  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

be. 
or  should    2.  You  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

be. 
or  should     3.  They  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

be. 


ENGLISH  GRAjNLMAR.  29 

PERFECT    TENSE. 

SingvJar.  Plural. 

1.  I  may,  can,  or  must  have  been.  1.  We  may,  can,  m-  must  have  been. 

2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  have  been.  ii.  You  may,  can,  or  must  have  been. 

3.  He  may,  can,  or  must  have  been.  3.  They  may,  can,  or  mast  have  been, 

PLUPEEFECT   TENSE. 

Singular.  ,  Plural. 

1.  I  might,  could,  would,  «r  should  have     1.  We  might,  could,  would,  or  should 

been.  have  been. 

2.  You  might,  could,  would,  or  should     2.  You  might,  could,  would,  o?-  should 

have  been.  have  been. 

S.  He  might,  could,  v/ould.  or  should     3.  They  might,  could,  would,  o/- shouldri 
have  been.  have  been. 

224.  Synopsis  of  the  Second  Person  Singula?^  zcith  Thot:. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

Pn'^.      Thou  art.  Prcs.     Thou  muyst,  canst,  or  must  be. 

//./■p.      Thou  wast.  Mj).     Thou  mightst,  couldst,  wouldst, 
Prrf.      Thou  hast  been.  or  shouldst  be. 

Pinj).     Thou  hadst  been.  Pe^f.     Thou  mayst,  canst,  or  must  have 
l.^f  F'/f.  Thou  shaU  or  wilt  be.  been. 

'2(1  /-'(/f.  Thou  wilt  have  been.  J\''qi.     Thou  niiguti'.,  couldst,  wouldst» 

or  shouldst  have  been. 

XIV.  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  FOREGOING  CONJUGATION. 

Q.  Why  is  am  a  verb  ?  (158.)  What  is  it  sometimes  called?  (222.)  Why  is 
it  so  called  ?  (222.) 

Q.  Will  you  give  the  synopsis  of  the  verb  to  be  with  /through  the  indicative 
mood  ? 

Q.  Will  you  conjugate  am  in  the  present  indicative  ?  Imperfect'?  Perfect  V 
Pluperfect?  1st  Future?  2d  Future?  Present  Potential?  Imperfect?  Perfect^' 
Pluperfect  ? 

Q.  In  what  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person,  is,  "lam?"  "Ami?"  "You 
were?"  "  I  have  been?"  "  Have  you  been?"  "  He  may  or  can  be?"  "  We  should 
be?"  "  He  may  have  been  ?"  "  They  should  have  been  ?"  "  Thou  shouldst  have 
been?"  "  Thoia  mayst  be  ?" 

Q.    Will  you  repeat  the  synopsis  with  thou  ? 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  The  girls  were  industrious.'''' 

225.  Were  is  a  verb  ;  it  implies  action  or  being — neuter; 
it  is  neither  active  nor  passive,  simply  expressing  being — 
INDICATIVE  MOOD ;  it  simply  indicates  or  declares  a  thing — 
IMPERFECT  TENSE  ;  it  cxprcsscs  past  time — "  1.  I  was  ;  2.  You 
were;  3.  He  was.  Blur.  1.  We  were;  2.  You  were;  3. 
They  were,  or  girls  were" — made  in  the  third  person  plu- 
ral, because  its  nominative  girls  is,  with  which  it  agrees, 
agreeably  to 

Rule  VII.  A  verb  must  agree  with  its  nominative  case  in 
number  and  person. 


30  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

Lidiutrious  is  an  adjecj'j'ive,  a  word  jcined  with  a  noun  to 
de;?cribc  it — *•'  inuustrious,  more  industrious,  most  industrious" 
— in  the  positive  decker  ;  it  describes,  without  any  compari- 
son— and  belongs  to  the  noun  iffr/5,  according  to 

IliTLE  IV.  Adjecficss  helon/^'  to  the  nouns  ivhich  they  describe. 

^^For  the  and  girls,,vi^-^\j  Rules  III.  and  VI. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 
"  William  is  atteutive."  "  Am  I  )-ouug?" 

"  John  is  studious."  "  Vfas  I  wrong?" 

"  We  are  jealous."  "  Have  we  been  wicked?" 

"  Thou  art  datiful."  "  Were  they  penitent  ?" 

"  Mary  has  been  intelligent."  "  Washington  was  patriotic." 

*'  The  boys  will  have  been  dutiful."  "  Columbus  was  enterprising." 

"  Their  estate  was  smaii."  "  My  wife's  mother  is  sick." 


XV.    OF  THE  ADVEm 

Q.    Whevi  I  say,  "  The  bird  diss  swiftly,"  I  do  not  mean  by  rsiftlu  to  describe 
livd:  what  does  siviftly  describe? 

228.  The  manner  of  fiying. 

Q.     To  vrhat  part  of  speech  \s  swifUy  joined  in  the  phrase,  "  The  bird  flies 
swiftly?" 

227.  To  the  verb  jiies. 

Q.    What  does  the  word  a(f';cri  signify? 

223.  Joined  to  a  verb. 

0.    What,  then,  shall  we  call  all  such  Avords  as  wjiftlyl 

229.  Adverbs. 

Q.     "  John  runs  very  swiftly."    Which  word  here  (describes  or  shows  how 
swittly  John  runs  ? 

S30.   Y'^ry. 

Q.    What  is  the  word  cfyvy  called,  and  all  such  words  as  qualify  or  describe 
adverbs? 

23,1.  Adverbs. 

Q.     "  Industrious,  more  industrious,  most  industrious."     What  are  more  and 
TMst  called  here,  and  why  ? 

232.  Adverbs,  because  they  describe  or  qualify  adjectives. 

Q.    From  the  foregoing  particulars,  what  appears  to  be  a  proper  definition  of 
adverbs? 

233.  Adverbs  are  words  joined  to  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
other  adverbs,  to  qualify  or  describe  them. 

Q.     "John  visits  me  often,,  but  Thomas  oftemr^     In  this  example,  we  see 
that  adverbs  may  be  compared:  will  you,  therefore,  compare  £00}%  ? 

234.  "  Soon,  sooner,  soonest." 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  31 

Q.    Will  you  Gompare  ickdy  ? 

235.  "  Wisel}^,  more  wisely,  most  ^Yis3]y." 

Q.    How  do  adverbs  ending  in  ly  appear  to  be  compared? 

236.  By  the  adverbs  movQ  and  most. 

Q.    Will  you  in  this  mtinner  compare  ndmirahly  1  foolwily  ? 

Q.  Many  adverbs  are  compared  like  adjeotives  oi  one  syllable,  tissoo'/i  above; 
but  there  is  a  very  considerable  number,  tue  comparison  ot  uliich  is  not  regula- 
ted by  any  general  rule.  The  following  list  embriiCGs  adverbs  variously  com- 
pared :  will  you  repeat  the  compai'ative  and  s>aperlative  of  eaeh,  as  1  name  the 
positive  ? 

237.  J'oiititie.  Comparaiiet.  SajjoiaHve. 

Often,                           oflener,  oftenest. 

Much,                           more,  most. 

Well,                            better,  best. 

Soon,                             sooner,  soonest. 

Justly,                            more  justly,  mogt  justly. 

Wisely,                         more  wisely,  most  >visely. 

Justly,                           less  justly,  least  justly. 

Badly,  or  ill,              M'orse,  worst. 

238.  Note. — Adverbs,  though  very  numerous,  may  nevertheless  be  reduced 
to  a  few  classes.  You  will  now  read  with  attention  the  following  list,  and  I  will 
then  ask  you  some  questions  respecting  each  class. 

1.  Of  number :  as  '"  Once,  twice,  thrice,"  &c. 

2.  Of  orderl:  as,  "First,  secondly,  thirdly,  fourthly,  fifthly, lastly,  finally,"  &.c. 

8.  Oi  place :  as,  "  Here,  there,  where,  elsewhere,  anywhere,  somewhere,  no- 
where, hence,  thence,  whithersoever/'  &c. 

4.  Of  tim(. 

Of  timepraent:  as,  ''  Now,  to-day,"  kc. 

Oi  time  past:  as,  "Already,  before,  lately,  yesterday,  heretofore,  hitherto, 
long  since,  long  ago,"  &c. 

Oi  time  to  come:  as,  "  To-morrow,  not  yet,  hereafter,  henceforth,  hencefor- 
ward, by  and  by,  instantly,  presently,  immediately,  straightways,"  &c. 

Of  time  indefiiute :  as,  "  Oft,  often,  oftimes,  ofceutimes,  sometimes,  soon,  sel- 
dom, daily,  weekly,  monthly,  yearly,  always,  when,  then,  ever,  never,  ai^ain,"  &c. 

5.  Of  qi.iAintiiy  :  as,  "Much,  little,  sufficiently,  how  much, how  great,  enough, 
abundantly,"  &c. 

6.  Oi  manner  or  quality:  as,  "Wisely,  foolishly,  justly,  unjustly,  quickly, 
slowly,"  <fcc.  Adverbs  of  quality  are  the  most  numerous  kind  ;  and  they  are 
generally  formed  by  adding  the  termination  ly  to  an  adjective  or  participle,  or 
changing  le  into  hj :  as,  "  Bad,  badly;  cheerful,  cheerfully ;  able,  ably ;  admirable, 
admirably." 

7.  Of  douU  :  as,  "Perhaps^  peradventure,  possibly,  perchance." 

S.  Of  aj!.r!7iaiio?i :  as,  "Verily,  truly,  undoubtedly,  doubtless,  certainly,  yea, 
yes,  surely,  indeed,  really,"  &c. 

9.  Of  maaUoJc:  as,  "  Nay,  no,  not,  by  no  means,  not  at  all,  in  no  wise,"  (fee. 

10.  Oi  interrogation :  as,  "  How,  why,  wherefore,  whether,"  &c. 

11.  Oi  co77iparison:  as,  "More,  most,  better,  best,  worse,  worst,  less,  leasts 
very,  almost,  little,  alike,"  <Scc. 

When  a  preposition  suffers  no  chnnge,  but  becomes  an  adverb  merely  by  its 
application  :  as,  when  we  say,  "  Hebrides  ahout ;"  "  He  was  near  falling  ;"  "'But 
do  not  after  lay  the  blame  on  me." 

There  are  also  some  adverbs,  which  are  composed  of  nouns,  and  the  letter  « 


32  ENGLISH  GRAMMAH. 

used  instead  of  a',  o?i,&c.:  as,  "Aside,  athirst,  afoot,  ahead,  asleep,  aboard, 
ashore,  abed,  agrouud,  afloat." 

Q.  Will  you  name  two  adverbs  of  number?  two  of  order?  two  of  place?  two 
of  time  present?  two  of  time  past?  two  of  time  to  come?  two  of  time  indetinite? 
two  of  quantity?  two  of  manner  or  quality  ?  two  of  doubt?  two  of  affirmation? 
two  of  negation?  two  of  interrogation  ?  two  of  comparison  ? 

Q.  Adjectives  describe  as  well  as  adverbs  :  how,  then,  can  you  tell  one  from 
the  other?    ' 

239.  Adjectives  describe  nouQS,  but  adverbs  describe  or 
qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs. 

Q.  This  fact  should  be  remeaibered ;  you  shall,  therefore  have  it  in  the  form 
of  a  rule  :  will  you  repeat  it? 

B.ULE  IX. 

Adverbs  qtiallff/  varh.'i,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs. 

Q.  From  had  we  form  the  adverb  hadly :  how,  then,  may  a  large  class  of  ad- 
verbs be  formed  ? 

240.  By  adding  ly  to  adjectives. 

Q.  Will  you  iu  this  manner  form  an  adverb  from  wi^e  7  from  great  ?  from 
si?ifid  ? 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

*'  The  bird  sings   sweetly.''^ 

241.  Sweetly  is  an  adverb,  a  word  used  to  qualify  a  verb 
adjective,  or  other  adverb ;  in  this  example  it  qualifies  the 
verb  sings,  agreeably  to 

Rule  IX.  Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other 
adverbs. 

^^° Sinr/s,  bird  and  the  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISES   IN    PARSING   CONTINUED. 

Adverbs  qualifying  verbs. 

"  The  soldiers  marched  slowly."  "  They  will  return  soon." 

"  The  girls  sing  delightfully."  "  The  boys  write  admirably." 

"  Henry  improves  rapidly."  "  Susan  dances  elegantly." 

Adverbs  qualifyinrj  culjeHives. 

"  He  was  very  attentive."  "  James  is  more  studious." 

"John  is  quite  busy."  "  Walter  is  most  studious." 

*  William  is  really  studious."  "  Ellen  is  less  happy." 

uidverbs  qualifying  verbs  and  other  adverbs. 
*'  You  learn  grammar  very  well."  "James  writes  most  elegantly." 

"  The  boys  write  too  fast."  "  I  will  assist  you  most  cheerfully." 

"  He  will  come  much  oftener." 

Adverbs  P/oniiscuomly  used. 
"  He  has  read  once."  "  John  is  not  happy." 

"  I  will  first  remind  you."  "  Whither  shall  I  fly  ?" 

"  1  saw  him  yesterday."  "  My  brother  sends  me  the  paper  month- 

"  I  have  eaten  sufticicutly."  ly." 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 
XVI.   01^  THE  PREPOSITION. 


33 


Q.     To  say,  •' The  cider  is  —  the  cellar,"  would  make  no  sea«e  :  can  you  iu- 
fonu  rae  what  would  muke  sense? 

242.  "  The  cider  is  in  the  cellar,"' 

Q.     By  placiti2:the  lit{^o  word  /n  after  cider  is,  and  before  lidlar,  t.h«  sentence 
is  rendered  complete  :  what  oSce,  then,  does  in,  pcrfor-::i? 

243.  It  connects  words,  and  thereby  shows   the   relation 
between  them. 

Q.     ^Vhat  does  the  word  prepocUkhi.  mean  ? 

2 14.  Placed  before. 

0.     What,  (hen,  may  those  words  like  ii^  be  called,  as  they  are  placed  before 
other  words  to  connect  them  with  worda  precedino;'^ 

245.  pRErosiTioNs. 

Q.     "What  then  are  preposition's  ? 

24(>.  Prepositions  are  words  used  to  connect  words,  and 
thereby  show  the  relation  between  them. 


217.  List  of  tilt  principal  Prepositions. 


Am-onj; 

at 

around 

^J 

amidst 

below 

:'.'.hwiirt 

between 

j.iter 

benpath 

a^out 

behind 

nirainst 

betwixt 

across 

beside 

above 

beyond 

according  to 

before 

througliout 
touching 

up 

upon 

U'.m'cr 

underneath 


concerning  near 

down  of 

except  olf 

excepting  on 

for  c/or 

from  out  of 

in  i-especting     unto 

into  to                     with 

instead  of  towards          within 

notwithstanding  through          without 

Q.     ATill  yoil  m'ebtion  the  prepositions  beginning  with  a  ?  with  Z< .'   e?  d?  tf 
/  ■    i  ?  n  }  o  /   r  ?  t  ?   u  ?  iy  :■' 

Q.     Will  you  now  repeat  ail  the  prepositions? 

(,>.     J)o  we  say,  "  He  worko  for  I,"  or,   "  He  works  for  me"'  ? 

Q.     In  what  case  is  me  ;'  (127.) 

Q.     V.'hat  case,  then,  follows  prepositions? 

248.  The  objective  case. 

Q.     This  fact  is  of  sufficient  importanc6  to  constitute  a  rule  :  will  you,  there- 
fore, repeat 

Prepositions  govern  the  ohjcciive  case. 
EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  John  found  his  hat  in  the  rcadP 
9J:Sk  In  is  a  FREPOSiTioJr,  a  word  used  to   connect  wordsj 
and  show  the  relation  between  them;  it  here  shows  the  rela- 
tion between  hat  and  road. 

Jload  is  a  noun  ;  it  is  a  name — common  ;  it   is  a  general 
name — nkuter  gender  ;  it  is  neither  male  nor  female — third 
PERSON  ;  it  is  spoken  of —singular  number  ;  it  means  but  one 
5 


34  ENGLISH  GRAMMAll. 

— OBJECTIVE  CASE ;  it  IS  the  object  of  the  relation  denoted  by 
the  preposition  in,  and  governed  by  it  according  to 
Rule  X.  Pi-epohitions  govern  the  objective  case.* 
EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 
*'  John  ran  througli  the  Louse  into  the    "  I  will  seYiCh  the  house  diligently  for 

garden."  him." 

"  We  have  deceived    him  to  our  sor-    **  Vv''e  mitrht  learn  the  lesson  before 

rov,'."  them." 

"  "We  came  in  sea.son."  "  According  to  my  impres-sion,  he  is  in 

"  You  study  grammar  for  your  improve-  fault." 

raent  in  lauguai^e."  **  Notwithstanding  his  poverty,  he  wa* 

"From   virtue  to   vice  the  progress  is  the  delight  of  his  acquaintances." 

gradual."  "  On  all  occasions  she  behaved  with 

*'  They   travelled   into  France  through  propriety." 

Italy."  "  Of  his  talents  we  might  say  much." 

"  He  lives  within  his  income."  "We   may    expect    a    calm    after  » 

*'  Without  the  aid  of  charity,  he  lived  storm." 

very  comfortably  by  his  indiutry ." 


XVII.  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION. 

Q.     When  I  say.  "  John his  book,"  the  sense,  yon  perceive,  is  incorapltt©. 

Can  you  put  a  word  into  the  blank  which  will  complete  the  sense  V 

250.  "  John  reads  his  book." 

Q.     Can  you  inform  me  what  the  foregoing  expression  is  called? 

251.  A  sentence. 

Q.    What,  then,  is  a  sentence? 

252.  A  collection  of  words,  forming  a  complete  sense. 

Q.  "  Life  is  short."  This  expression  is  called  a  sentence  :  can  you  tell  m»' 
what  kind,  and  why  ? 

253.  It  is  a  simple  sentence,  because  it  makes  sense,  and 
has  but  one  nominative  and  one  verb. 

Q.    What  does  the  term  comjpound  mean  ? 

254.  It  means  composed  of  two  or  more  tJiin^s. 

Q.  "  Life  is  short,  and  art  is  long."  This  sentence  is  made  up  of  two  simple 
Bcntences :  vrhat,  therefore,  may  it  be  called  ? 

255.  A  compound  sentence. 

Q.     What,  then,  is  a  compound  sentence  ? 

256.  A  compound  sentence  contains  two  or  more  simple 
sentences  connected  together. 

Q.    What  does  the  term  conjunction  signify  ? 

257.  Union  ov  joining  together, 

Q.  la  the  compound  sentence,  "  John  writes,  and  William  learn««,"  the  sim- 
ple sentences  are  joined  together  by  the  word  arat^;  what  word,  then,  may  and 
be  called? 

258.  A  Conjunction. 


*  The  remaining  Avords  are  pnrscd  as  before. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  35 

Q,  The  kin:;  and  queen  are  r.ii  amiable  pair."  In  this  sentence,  words  and 
not  sentences  are  conuected  by  arid :  can  you  point  out  the  words  so  connected  ? 

259.  Ki7ig  and  queen.  \ 

Q.  From  the  foregoing  particulars,  what  appears  to  be  the  use  of  the  con- 
junction ? 

260.  A  conjunction  is  used  to  connect  words  and  sen- 
tences together. 

Q.     Wlien  I  say,  "  Five  and  four  are  nine,"  what  do  I  mean  ? 

201.  Five  added  to  four  make  nine. 

Q.    What,  then,  is  nnpliod  by  and'? 

262.  Addition. 

Q.  When  I  ?ay,  *'  I  will  go,  if  you  will  accompany  me,"  what  does  the  con- 
junction if  imply '? 

263.  Condition  or  supposition. 

Q.    What  does  tlie  word  copulati-vf  mean? 

264.  Uniting,  joining,  or  Unking  together. 

Q.     And,  if,  tc.  are  called  copulative  conjunctions  :  can  you  tell  me  why  ? 

265.  Because  a  copulative  conjunction  connects  or  con- 
tinues a  sentence  by  expressing  an  addition,  a  supposition, 
a  cause,  &c. 

Q.  The  following  arc  the  principal  conjunctions  of  this  class:  will  you  repeat 
them  * 

206.  "  And,  both,  because,  besides,  for,  if,  provided,  since, 
then,  that,  therefore,  wherefore." 

Q.  When  I  say,  "James  and  John  will  come,"  I  mean  both  will  come;  but 
when  I  say,  "James  or  John  will  come,"  what  do  I  mean? 

2G7.  That  either  James  or  John,  one  of  them,  will  come. 

Q.    Are  the  words  in  this  sentence,  then,  joined  or  disjoined  ? 

268.  Disjoined. 

Q.    What  word  is  it  that  expresses  the  disjoining? 

269.  dr. 

Q.    What  part  of  speech  is  or  ? 

270.  Conjunction. 

Q.     What  does  the  word  disjunctive  mean  ? 

271.  Disjoining  or  separating. 

Q.     Wbat  kind  of  a  conjunction,  then,  shall  we  call  <>r? 

272.  A  disjunctive  conjunction. 

Q.  "  James  will  come,  but  Henry  will  not."  Here  the  two  clauses  of  the 
sentence  arc  opposed  to  each  other  in  meaning,  and  the  word  5«^  separates  these 
two  clauses  :  what,  then,  does  this  word  imply  ? 

273.  Opposition  of  meaning. 

Q.    From  the  foregoing,  what  appears  to  be  Ihc  use  ef  the  dipjunctive  eea- 

j  unction? 


38  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

274.  The  conjunction  disjunctive  connects  sentences,  by 
expressing  opposition  of  meaning  in  various  degrees. 

Q.  The  following  are  the  principal  conjuucLions  of  this  class  ;  will  vou  repeat 
them  ? 

275.  "But,  than,  though,  either,  or,  as,  unless,  neither,  nor, 
less,  yet,  notwithstanding." 

Q.  Prepositions,  you  recollect,  connect  words,  as  well  as  conjunctions;  how, 
then,  can  you  tell  ihe  one  from  tlie  other? 

270.  Prepositions  show  the  relation  between  words,  but 
conjunctions  express  an  addition,  a  supposition,  a  cause,  or 
an  opposition  of  meaning. 

Q,     *'  He  and  she  write."    In  what  case  is  lie  ?  ilic^  7 

Q.  The  pronouns  he  and  she,  you  perceive,  are  both  in  the  same  case,  and 
connected  by  the  conjunction  a/i-c^ .'  when,  th.en,,  may  nouns  and  pronouns  be 
connected? 

277.  When  they  are  in  the  same  case. 

Q.     **She  will  sing  and  dances."    How  may  this  sentence  be  corrected? 

278.  "She  v/iil  sing  and  dance." 

Q.     Tn  v/hat  mood  and  tense  is,    "  She  will  sing?" 

Q.  To  say,  "  She  dance,"  is  incorrect;  dance,  then,  in  this  example,  cauiaot 
be  in  the  pre;-:ont  tense  :  will  you,  then,  inform  me  what  "She  will  sing  and  dance" 
means,  when  i'ully  expressed  ? 

279.  "  She  will  sing  and  she  will  dance." 

Q.  Here  will  dance  is  in  the  future  tense,  as  well  as  will  sing :  when,  then, 
may  verbs,  in  genei^l,  be  connected? 

280.  When  they  are  in  the  same  mxood  and  tense. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing  particulars,  what  appears  to  be  the  rule  for  the  use  of 
conjunctions,  in  connecting  words? 

HUIjSI    XL 
Conjunctions  usually  conncxt   verbs  of  the  Sfune  7nood  and 
tense,  and  nouns  or  pronouns  of  the  same  case. 
EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

''  John  assists  his  father  and  mother.''' 

281.  And  is  a  conjunction,  a  word  chiefly  used  to  connect 
words  and  sentences — copul.'^tive;  it  connects  father  and 
mother. 

Mother  is  a  noun  ;  it  is  a  name — co»tmon  ;  it  is  a  general 
name — feminine  gender  ;  it  is  the  name  of  a  female — third 
person  ;  it  is  spoken  of — singular  number  ;  it  means  but  one 
— and  it  is  one  of  the  objects  of  ^/6'c<.7'5;;5,  and  is,  therefore,  in 
the  osjECTivE  CASE,  and  connected  y^'Wh.  father  by  the  con- 
junction «?2<'/,  according  to 

Rule  XI.  Conjunctions  usually  connect  verbs  of  the  same 
mood  a7id  tense,  and  ncuns  or  pronouns  of  the  same  case. 


ENGLISH  GEAMMAR.  37 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 

I  will  reward   him   aad   thein  at  some  "  She  i-eads  well,  dances  (3.)  elegantly, 

future  time."  and  plays  aduiirably   ob   the  piauo- 

)  *'  We  in  vain  (1.)  look  for  a  path  between  forte."  ' 

virtue  anti  vice."  "intemperance  destroys  the  mind  and 

"  ReproQf  cither  hardecs  or  softens  its  benumbs  the  senses'of  man." 

object."  "  Yon  ma}-  read  this  seutcuce  first, and 

'•  In  the  morning  of  life,  wo  eagerly  pvr-  then  parse  it." 

sue  pleasure,but  oftentimes  meet  (2.)  "He  has  equal  knowledge,  but  inferior 

with  sad  disappointments."  ludgmeiit." 

"A  ^ood  scholar  never  mutters  nor  dis-  "  John  ri.^e?  early  in  the  morning,  and 

obeys  his  instructor."  pursues  his  studies." 


XVIIL   OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

Q.  When  I  exclaim,  "  Oh  !  I  have  ruined  my  friend,"  "Alas  I  I  fenrfor  life," 
which  words  here  appear  to  be  thrown  in  between  the  sentences,  to  express 
passion  or  feeling? 

282.  Ok!  Alas! 

(\.    What  does  interjection,  mean  ? 

283.  Thrown  hetweeif. 

Q.    What  name,  then,  shall  we  give  such  words  as  oh .'  alas .'  &.c.  ? 

284.  Interjections. 

Q.    What,  then,  are  interjections? 

285.  Interjections  are  words  thrown  in  between  the  parts 
of  sentences,  to  express  the  passions  or  sudden  feelings  oi' 
the  speaker. 

LIST  OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

1.   Of  envncftnc^?  or  gri"/ :  T'.^,^^0\  oh!  alas!  ah"' 
'J.   Of  wonder ;  as,  "Really!  strange!" 

5.  Of  calling ;  as,  "Eallool  ho!   hem!" 

4.  Of  (.cttcniion;  as.  Behold!  lo !   hark!" 

h.    (ilf  d:\yvst  ;  as,  "  Foh  !  fy  !  fudge  !  awaj  !" 

6.  Of  silence;  as,  "Hush!  hist!" 

7.  Of  contempt ;  as,  "Pish!  tush!" 

5.  Of  saluting  ;  a.^,  "Welcome!  hail!" 

Q.  Will  you  examine  the  foregoing  list,  and  then  nam?  an  interjection  of 
jrrief?  One  of  wonder?  One  of  calling?  One  of  attention  ?  One  of  disgust  ? 
One  of  silence?     One  of  saluting? 

Q.     Hov/  may  an  interjection  generally  be  known? 

285.  By  its  taking  an  exclamation  point  after  it. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
'•  Oh  !  I  have  alienated  my  friendy 


(1. )  Jn  vain  kieans  the  same  as  ijainhj.  It  may,  therefore,  be  called  an  adver- 
bial phrase,  qualifying  looh,  by  Rule  IX. 

(2.)  ile^.t  agrees  with  we  understood,  and  is,  therefore,  connected  y:it\i  prcrsvf. 
by  the  conjunction  bv.t,  according  to  Rule  XI. 

i'i.)  Dancer  and  jjk'?/.'?  both  agree  with  she,  understood,  and  are,  therefore  con- 
nected, the  former  with  reach,  and  the  latter  with  dances,  by  Rule  XI.  ' 


38  ENGLISH  GHAMMArt. 

287.  Oil  is  an  interjection,  a  word  used  to  express  passion 
or  ice  ling. 

1^^  The  remaiuing  words  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISES  IX  PARSING  CONTINUED. 
"  Oh!   I  must  o;o  and  pcc  (1.)  ruj  dear    "  Strange!    I  did  not  know  vou." 

fatlior  befvirc  (2.)  he  dies."       '  "  Hush  !  our  insti-ucter  isatthedoor." 

"  We  ea.u'orly  pursue  pleasure,  but,  ahis  !     **  I y  !   how  angrj  he  is  I" 

\vc  often  mistake  the  road  to  its  (3.) 

enjoyment." 

n.)  The  sense  is,  "I  must  go,  and  I  must  see;"  tlie  verb  see,  then,  agrees 
with  /,  understood,  and  is,  therefore,  connected  with  im<st  go,  according  to 
Rule  XI. 

i5.)  B^'fore.r.n  adverb. 

{/}.)  Apply,  first,  Rule  T, ;  thon,  Rule  I. 


RECAFiTULATION. 

CRITICAL    REMARKS. 

XIX.  ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

28S.  English  Gkasimar  teaches  us  to  speak  and  write  the 
English  language  correctly. 

289.  Grammar  is  divided  into  four  parts,  namely, 

290.  1.  OmiiOGRAPiiY,  3.  Syntaz, 
2.  Etymology,  4.  Prosody. 

0 

XX.    OF  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

291.  OuTiiograpiiy  includes  a  knowledge  of  the  nature 
and  power  of  letters,  and  teaches  how  to  spell  words  cor- 
rectly. This  part  of  grammar  is  usually  learned  from 
ispelling-books  and  dictionaries. 

292.  Orthography  means  ivord-makivg  or  spelling. 

0^ 

XXI.  OF  ETYMOLOGY. 

293.  Etymology  teaches  how  to  form,  from  all  the  words 
in  the  English  language,  several  grand  divisions  or  sorts, 
commonly  called  Parts  of  Speech. 

294.  It  includes  a  knowledge  of  the  meaning  and  use  of 
words — also  their  dilTerent  changes  and  derivations. 

295.  EtymohgTj  signifies  the  origin  ov  pedigree  of  words. 


XXII.  OF  SYNTAX. 

290.  Syntax  teaches  hcvr  to  arrange  or  form  words  into 
^sentences  correctlv. 


40  ENGLISH  GEAMMAR. 

297.  It  incluues  a  knowlncl;^?.  of  the  rules  of  composition, 
formed  from  the  practice  of -the  best  writers  raid  speakers. 

298.  Syntax  ^\g\-\\n^i^  arranging  ov  placing  togtiker ;    or, 
as  used  in  grammar,  sentence-maki ng . 


XXm.  ETYMOLOGY  AND  SYNTAX  COMBINED. 

299.  The  words  of  the  English  language  are  usually- 
divided  into  nine  sorts,  commonly  called  Parts  of  Speech, 
namely, 

KOUN,  TRONOUX,  PREPOSITIOX,' 

ARTICLE.  VERI5,  COXJUXCTIOX, 

ADJi:CTlVE.  ADVEIU5,  I-XTERJECTION. 


XXIV.  OF  NOUNS. 

300.  A  noun  is  the  name  of  any  persoii,  place  or  thing ; 
as,  7n,an,  Richmond^  hiife. 

301.  Nouns  are  of  two  kinds,  proper  and  common. 

CoMMOX  nouus  arc  general  names ;  that  is,  they  are  names  common  to  all  in- 
clividuals  of  the  same  kind  or  sort ;  as,  home,  city,  river. 

302.  Proper  nouns  are  particular  names  ;  that  is,  they  are  the  names  of  par- 
ticular individuals  of  the  same  kind  or  sort ;   us,  G'eorc/e,  ,'<hreve/jort,  LouUiana. 

S05.  When  proper  names  have  an  article  placed  before  them,  they  are  used 
as  common  names  ;  as,  "  lie  is  the  Cicero  of  his  age." 

3i4.  Wlien  a  proper  noun  admits  of  a  plural,  it  becomes  a  common  noun; 
as,  "The  twelve  6(f;.w/>,"  or,  "  The  seven  ./twnew.''."  This  is  obvious  from  the 
fact,  that  a  proper  name  IS,  in  its  nature,  descriptive  of  one  object  only,  and, 
therefore,  essentially  singular.  Accordingly,  the  nouns  t^paniard,  European^ 
Amf/ricnji;  La.  are  common  nouus,  as  well  as  their  plurals,  ^i^ainardtf,  Earopeam, 
jimericans,  inc.  '^' 

o05.  Common  nouns  may  also  be  used  to  si;^nify  individuals,  by  the  addition 
of  articles  or  pronouns  ;  as,  /'  The  boy  is  studious  ;"  "  That  (jirl  is  discreet." 

300.  When  a  noun  signifies  many,  it  is  called  a  noun  of  multitude,  or  a  col- 
lective noun  ;  as,  "  The  pcople,^^  "  The  array P 

.S07.  Ai-Mruct  signiiies  takoi  from:  hence  an  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a, 
quality  abstracted  from  its  substance ;  as,  knoivUdr/e,  (^oodne.<>s,  virlite,  &c. 

308.  To  nouns  belong  person,  gender,  number  and  case. 


-o- 


XXY.  PERSON. 
S09.  Yv'hen  any  per.ion,  in  speaking,  introdaces  his  own 

'^ Spain,  is  the  proper  name  of' a  country,  and  Sponiard  has,  by  some  gram- 
marians, been  called  the  proper  name  of  a  "people;  but  the  latter  is  a  generic 
term,  characterizing  any  one  of  a  great  number  of  persons,  iu  their  counexioa 
with  Spain.— i:V'-.'/'''''',;-'i ■':V^ 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


41 


I     iiame,  it  is  the  fir&t  person;  as,  "I,  James,  of  the  city  of 
Shreveportj  do  givo,"  ceo. 

310.  The  iiame  of  the  person  spoken  to,   is  the  second 
person  ;  a.s,  "  James,  come  to  me." 

311.  The  name  of  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of,  or  about;' 
is  the  third  person  ;  as,  ''James  has  come." 


XXVI.  GENDER. 

312.  Gender  is  the  distinction  of  sex. 

313.  Nouns  have  four  genders — the  masculine,  the  fem- 
inine, the  common,  and  the  neuter. 

314.  The  masculine  gender  denotes  the  names  of  males; 
as  man,  hoy,  &zg. 

3^5.  The  feminine  gender  denotes  the  names  of  females; 
ias,  icomaUf  girl. 

31 G.  The  common  gender  denotes  the  names  of  such  ani- 
mals as  may  be  eitiier  male  or  female  ;  as,  parent,  bird. 

317.  The  neuter  gender  denotes  the  names  of  objects 
which  are  neither  males  nor  fen:iales  ;  as,  chair,  table. 

SIS.  Some  nouns,  naturally  neuter,  do,  t  j.  a  ficrurc  cf  speech,  as  it  is  called, 
become  masculine  or  feminine  ;  as  v.Iicu  \vc  say  of  the  sun,  '■'■  ]Jo  is  scttiLtr,"  end 
of  a  ship,  "  Sue  sails  well,"  tSsc. 

S19.    The  English  language  has  tbrce  methods  cf  distiusuldung  sex,  viz  : 
ClO-l.    Ly  diiTerent  vrords  ;'as, 


Male. 

Female. 

.   ILale. 

•  F>.77icae. 

Bachelor, 

Maid. 

ITusbaud, 

^ifo. 

Boar, 

Sow. 

King, 

Queen. 

J>oy, 

Girl. 

Bad, 

Lass. 

Brother, 

Sister. 

!  Bold, 

:    Lrtdy. 

]iuck, 

Boe. 

j   Man, 

"VVoiiian. 

Bull, 

CoAV. 

Jtlaster, 

Z'listress. 

Bullock  or  ^ 
Steer, 

Ikifcr. 

Jlilter, 
Nephe;r, 

Spav.ncr. 
Isiecc. 

Cock, 

Hen. 

Kam,- 

Ewe. 

Doe, 
Brake, 

Bitch. 
Buck. 

Singcr, 

Songstress  or 

Singer. 

3Iadain. 

Earl, 

Countess. 

Sir, 

Father, 

Mother. 

Sloven, 

Slut. 

Friar, 

Kun. 

Son, 

I)aughter. 

Gander, 

Coose. 

Stao-, 

Hind. 

Hart, 

Boe. 

Uncle, 

i\unt. 

Horse, 

liiaro. 

Wizard, 

Witch; 

6 

42 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


By  a  difference  of  termination  ;  as, 


Abbott, 

Actor, 

Administrator, 

Adulterer, 

Ambassador, 

Arbiter, 

Baron, 

Bridegroom, 

Benefactor, 

Caterer, 

Chanter, 

(^'onductor, 

Count, 

Czar, 

Deacon, 

Duke, 

Elector. 

Emperor 

Prince, 

I'rior, 

Prophet, 

Protector, 

I'roprietor, 

Shepherd, 

Songster, 

Sorcerer, 

SI 0-3. 


Female.             ' 

Male. 

Female. 

Abbess. 

Enchanter, 

Enchantress. 

Actress. 

Executor, 

Executrix. 

Administratrix. 

God, 

Goddess.  ■ 

Adulteress. 

Governor, 

Governess. 

Ambassadress. 

Heir, 

Heiress. 

Arbitress. 

Hero, 

Heroine. 

Baronness. 

Hunter, 

Huntress. 

]inde. 

Host, 

'     Hostess. 

Benefactress. 

Instructor, 

Instructress. 

Cateress. 

Jew, 

Jewess. 

Chantress. 

Landgrave, 

Landgravine. 

Conductress. 

Lion, 

Lioness. 

Countess. 

Marquis, 

Marchioness. 

Czarina. 

Mavor, 

Mayoress. 

Deaconess. 

Patron, 

Patroness. 

Duchess. 

Peer, 

Peeres.s. 

Elcctrcss. 

Poet, 

Poetess. 

Empress. 

Priest, 

Priestess. 

Princess. 

Sultan, 

\  Sultaness. 

I'rioress. 

■(  Sultana. 

Prophetess. 

Tiger, 

Tigress., 

l^rotectress. 

Traitor, 

Traitress. 

Proprietress, 

Tutor, 

Tutoresso;-Tutrix 

Shepherdess. 

A'iscount, 

Visconntess. 

Songstress. 

Votary, 

Votaress. 

Sorceress. 

Widower, 

Widow. 

By  prefixing  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  adjective  ;  as, 

A  cock-sparrow,  A  hen-sparrow, 

K  njan-servant,  A  maid-servant. 

A  he-goat,  A  she-goat. 

A  he-bear,  A  she-bear. 

A  male  child,  A  female  child. 

Male  descendants.  Female  descendants. 


XXVII.    NUMBER. 

320.  Number  shows  how  many  are  meant,  whether  one 
or  more. 

321.  Nouns  have  two  numbers,the  singular  and  the  plural. 

322.  The  singular  number  expresses  but  one  ;  as,  hoy, 

323.  The  plural  number  implies  more  than  one  ;  as,  hoys. 

324.  Some  nouns  are  u.sed  in  the  singular  number  only  ; 
as,  wheats  gold,  sloth,  pride,  dutifulness. 

325.  Other  nouns  are  used  in  the  plural  number  only ; 
as,  hellows,  scissors,  lungs,  riches,  &c. 

326.  Some  nouns  are  the  same  in  both  numbers  ;  as,  deer, 
sheep,  swine. 

327.  The  plural  number  of  nouns  is  regularly  formed  by 
adding  s  to  the  singular;  as,  sing.  do\e,phir.  doves. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


43 


823.  The  irregular  mode  of  forming  the  plural  is  as  follovrs  :  when  the  uoun 
singulcir  ends  in  x,  civ  soft,  sh,  or  ss,  we  add  cslo  form  the  plural ;  as,  ioj:,  loxcs ; 
Jiurch,  churches  ;  la&h,  lashes ;  kiss,  tisies. 

S29.  J!^ouna  ending  in/ or,/!?,  change  these  terminations  into  ves  to  form  the 
plural ;  as,  loaf,  loans  ;  unfe,  loives. 

SOU.  \Yhcr,  a  noun  singular  ends  in  y,  with  a  vowel  before  it,  the  plural  is 
formed  reguUalv  ;  as,  /cy,  ktys  ;  delay,  dciayt<  :  talhy,  i-allajs.  But  if  the  y  does 
not  have  a  vowel  before'  it,  the  plural  is  fcimed  by  chitugiug  y  into  ics :  as,  jiy, 
jlUii ,'  beavty,  leauiies. 

331.  The  following  nouns  form  their  plurals  not  according  to  anj- general 
Tules :  — 


Fish, 

Cupful, 

Spoonful, 

Brother-in-law, 

Court-martial,  j> 

Brother, 


332.     MothemaUcs,  7neiaj)l'.ys'(es,pnevmat/cs,  ethics,  politics 


Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Flur. 

Man, 

1*1  en. 

Mouse, 

Mice. 

AVoman, 

"Women. 

Louse, 

Lice, 

Child, 

Children, 

Cow, 

Cows  or 
Kine. 

Ox, 

Oxen, 

Tooth, 

Teeth. 

Penny, 

Pence,  (1.) 

Foot, 

i^eet. 

Die, 

Dice,   (2.) 

Goose, 

Cleese. 

Pea, 

Peas,  (3.) 

Plur. 

Fishes.  (3.) 

Cupfuls. 

►Spoonfuls. 

]irothers-iu-law, 

Courts-martiaL 
(  Broth.ers  or 
\  Brethren. 

&c.  are  reckoned 


either  as  singular  or  plural  nouns.  The  same  is  equally  tiue  of  jrnans,  alma, 
amends.  Aiiti}-oJ(.)<,  crtdcnda,  imuyiia^,  littrali,  &c.  are  always  plural.  Pandit 
is  now  considered  the  singular  of  handiUi.  The  noun  news  is  always  singular. 
Many  nouns  form  their  plurals  according  to  the  laws  of  the  language  from  which 
they  are  dei'ived.    The  following  are  of  this  class  : 


Singula)'. 
Antithesis, 

Appendix, 

Apex, 

Arcanum, 

Automaton, 

Axis, 

r>eau. 

Basis, 

Calx, 

Cherub, 

Crisis, 
Criterion, 
Datum, 
Dia?resis, 

Desideraiiua. 
Lllluvium, 
Kliipsis, 
Emphasis, 

Encomium, 

]'h'ratum, 


Plvral. 

Antitheses. 
(  Appendixes  w 
(  Appendices. 

Apices. 

Arcana. 

Autojnata. 

Axes. 

Beaux  or  Beaus 

Bases. 

Calces. 
(  Cherubim  or 
"(  Cherubs. 

Crises. 

CriU-ria. 

i}iua. 

•  i)iioreses. 

Desiderata. 

Effluvia. 

Ellipses. 

Emphases. 
i  Encomia  or 
(  Encomiums. 

Errata. 


Singular. 
Genius, 
Genus, 
Hypothesis, 
Ignis  fa:uus. 

Index, 

Lamina, 
Magnus, 

Mem.orandum, 

Metamorphosis, 

Parenthesis, 

Phenomenon, 

Radius, 

Stamen, 

Seraph, 

Stimulus, 
Stratum, 
Thesis, 
Vertex, 


, Vortex, 

XXVIII.'    CASE. 


Plural. 

Genii.  (4.) 

Genera. 

Hypotheses. 

Ignes  fatui. 
(  indices  or 
'(  Indexes  (5.) 

Lamime. 

Magi, 
i  Memoranda  or 
\  Memorandums. 

Metamorphoses. 

Parentlieses. 

Phenomena. 

Badii  or  Radiuses.  ^ 

Stamina. 
'  Seraphim  or 
1  Seraph.s. 

Stimuli. 

Strata. 

Theses. 

A'ertices. 
(  Vortices  or 
\  Vortexes. 


.  333.  Case  means  the  different  state,  condition,  or  relation 
which  nouns  have  to  other  words  in  the  same  sentence. 


(1.)  7Vn?z/(;s  when  the  coin  is  meant.  (2.)  i^jV*- for  coining.  (3.)  Picse  and 
•'sA,  meaning  quantities  ;  h\xi pea^  andJisTies,  when  number  is  meant. 

(4.)  Genii  when  denoting  aerial  or  imaginary  spirits  :  annivsfs,  when  denot- 
ing persons  of  genius.  (5.)  /ya/t,T6«,  when  denoting  pointers  or  tables  of  con- 
kents  J  htdicts,  when  referring  to  algebraic  quantities. 


44  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

831.  In  English,  nouns  have  three  cases — the  nominative, 
the  possessive,  and  ihp  objective. 

335.  The  ncmiiintive  case  is  ii^nall}"  the  cgcnt  or  doer, 
and  always  ihc  subject  of  the  verb. 

SGG.  The  subject  is  the  ibinj:  chiefly  ?poken  of;  ns,  "John  assists  VriUinm;" 
here,  Jmn  is  the  toubject  spoken  of,  or  the  uomiiiative  case  to  the  veib  assists. 

£37.  The  possessive  case  denotes  possession,  ownership, 
property,  &c  ;  as,  **  William's  book."  This  cnse  maybe 
distinguished  irum  the  oihcr  cases  by  tlic  apostrophe  or  the 
letter  5. 

5-33,  A  noun  in  the  singuhir  forms  ifs  possessive  case  by 
taking  the  apostrophe  and  the  letters  alter  it;  as,  "John's 
liat.'' 

o39.  Plural  nouns  usually  form  their  possessive  case  sim- 
ply by  t.-iking  tho,  apostrophe  ;  as,  *'  On  eagles'  vv-ings." 

340.  When  the  phii'al  of  nouns  docs  not  end  in  .•?,  thcj  form  their  possessive 
case  hy  taking  both  the  apostrophe  and  the  letter  s  ;  as  ^'' Men's  houses." 

S4V.  When  the  siiiprnlar  ends  in  ff,  the  apostrophe  only  is  added;  as,  "For 
goodness'  sake  ;"  except  the  noun  tciihtas  ;  as,  *'  The  witness's  deposition." 

342:  .Kouns'endinp:  in  vce  forni  the  possessive  by  adding  the  apostrophe  only ; 
rs,  ^*  VoY  conscience'  siike:"  because  an  additional  s  uoukl  occasicn  too  much  of 
the  hissing  Soiiiid,  or  increase  the  diiiiculty  o/  pronunciation. 

S13.  The  objective  case  denotes  the  object  of  an  action 
or  relation. 

Zii.  lo  the  sentence,  "John  strikes  him," /iJ/Ti  is  the  object  of  the  action 
denoted  by  .^/r^'AV*,"  and  in  the  ?enten<  c,  "lie  went  from  Loudon  to  York," 
J  ct/c  is  the  oljeci  of  the  relation  denoted  by  the  preposition  to. 

C15.    DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


' 

oir.rjvlar. 

Plural. 

Sinoiilar. 

Plural. 

Nominctivf  cnsc, 

Mother, 

Jlothers. 

Man, 

I^Ien. 

Posaesdte  chsey 

Mother's, 

■     brothers'. 

^fan's, 

>fen's. 

Objective  ca&e, 

Mother, 

■  Mothers. 

Man, 

Men. 

TJiQ  possessive  case  is  goverjicd  hy  the  follotcing  noun. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

^^  Joints  luife  returned.^^ 

310.  JGlin'^s  is  a  rr.orER  noun,  of  theiMAscuLiNE  crxder,  the 

THir.D  rr:R?o.\\  ptngul.mi  Nu:.iDEa,  possessive  case,  and  governed 

by  luife,  by  Rule  I. 

.    Wife  IS  a  co'iMON  noun,  of  the  feminine  gender,  the  third 

PERSON,  SINGULAR    NUrJCER,    aud    NOMINATIVE  CASE  tO  retunicd, 

]Dy  Rule  VI. 

Returned  is  an  intransitive  verb,  in  the  indicative  mood, 


EKGLISH  GRAMMAR.  45 

IMPERFECT  TENPE — "  1.  I  returned;  2.  You  returned ;  3.  He 
returned,  or  wile  returned" — made  in  tho  third  tersox,  sin- 
gular, and  agrees  wilh  zy?/^,  Rule  VII. 

MORE  EXERCISrS  IX  SYNTAX. 

"  'WilHam's  son  has  come."  "  William's  wife's  sister  rcniaiaed  in 

"John's  brother  died,"  town." 

"  Joliii  makes  (1.)  boys'  hats.  "  Ivufiis  sf  nclicd  .Tchnson's  Dictionary." 

"  John  lost  his  knilo."  ''  ifary's  bonnet  is  old." 

"  Tiie  boys  neglected  Iheir  lessons."  "  Virtue's  jevrard  is  sure."  (2.) 

,"  Intemperance  ruius  its  votiuies."  "  lUvIus's  hat  is  new." 

SEXTEXC:iS  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 
"Brolhcrs  estate.'' 

S47.  If  you  examine  the  forcgoiuc:  example,  you  will  find  it  difHcuIt  to  ascer- 
tain whether  the  estate  is  the  property  of  one  brother  or  more;  if  of  one  only, 
an  apostrophe  should  precede  the  f,  thus;  "  Drother's  estate  :"  but  if  it  belonj;s 
to  more  than  one,  an  apostrophe  should  follow  the  *■,  tiius;  "  Brothers' estate." 
Mistakes  of  this  sort  often  occur;  hence  you  perceive  the  importance  in  writing, 
of  atteudiuj^  to  the  subject  of  graramar. 

^' lilans'  Jiappinessy 

ol8.  Incorrect,  because  mans'  is  in  the  possessive  case, 
singular  number,  and,  therefore,  the  apostrophe  should  be 
placed  before  the  s,  according  to  the  observations  above, 
and  Art.  SS3. 

SENTENCES  TO  EE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED,  CONTINUED. 

"  Johns  son  departed."  '•  I  discovered  Marias  faults." 

*'  Hasans  sister  will  learn."  "  vSusan  made  little  Ilariiets  bonnet." 

"  Charles  task  is  too  diilicult."  "  Johnson  makes  mens  shoes." 

"  I  have  read  Willi's  poem." 

EXERCISES  TO  BE  VrT.ITTEN.-- 

S40.  Will  you  write  down  two  sentences,  each  containing  a  proper  noun,  as 
for  example,  "William  learns  grammar"':'  One,  contaiuii.'g  a  corninon  noun  ? 
One,  coutaiiiing  a  noun  of  ihe  third  person  singular?  One,  of  the  third  person 
plural,  and  in  the  nominative  case?  One,  having  a  noun  of  the  second  person 
singular  and  of  the  feminine  gender?  One,  luv.  ing  a  noun  the  name  of  some 
article  of  food  ?  Oue,  having  a  noun  the  name  of  some  quality  ?  One,  having  a 
roun  of  multitude?  Oue,  having  your  own  name  associated  with  hoob ;  as,  "  John 
Ciriscom's  book"? 


XXIX.  OF  ARTICLES. 

350.  Articles  are  words  put  before  nouns,  to  point  them 
out,  or  to  limit  their  meaning. 

o51.  There  are  two  articles,  a  or  an,  and  the. 
)2.  A  01"  AN  is  called  the  indeilnite  article. 


CiO, 


)  Active-transitive  verb.       (2.)  Aiijectivo,  and  belongs  to  rtwcrd,  by  Rule  IV. 
*  Either  on  a  slate  or  in  a  small  maauscript  book  kept  for  the  purpose. 


4G  ENGLISH  GRAMMAru 

353.  The  is  called  the  defmite  article. 

oH.  The  article  a  is  called  indefinite,  because  it  means  no  particular  person 
or  thins;;  as  "  a  house,"  "  a  man,"  that  is,  a/,^  house,  a/^i/  man.  The  article  ih€ 
is  called  detiuite,  because  ic  means  some  particular  person  or  thing;  as,  *'tUe 
house,"  *'tue  man,"  meaning  some  particular  house,  ssome  particular  man. 

555.  A  becomes  an  before  a  vowel,  and  before  a  silent  h;  as,  "  a?t  acorn," 
•'flTi/ hour."  But  if  the  7/ be  sounded,  the  a  only  is  used;  as,  "a  hand,"  '"a 
heart :"  except  when  the  word  before  which  the  article  is  placed,  has  its  accent 
on  the  second  syllable  ;  as,  "  cm  heroic  action,"  "  (ui  historical  account." 

o5G.  Before  words  beginning  with  u  long,  a  is  used  instead  of  an;  as,  "a 
union,"  "  a  university,"  "  a  useful  thing." 

;357.  A  is  also  used  for  an  before  the  word  one,  because,  in  pronouncing  one, 
wu  sound  it  as  if  written  wun. 

358.  The  article  a  or  an  means  one;  as,  "  an  ounce,"  "  a  pound,"  that  is,  one 
ounce,  one  po'und. 

RULE   11. 

5Vi5  indefinite  article  a  or  an  belongs  to  nouns  of  the  singular 

number. 
RULE   III. 

The  definite  article  the  belongs  to  nouns  in  the  singular  or 
j)lural  number, 

S59.  Kzception.  When  the  adjectives  few,  (freat  many,  dozen,  hundred,  thov- 
sand,  &c.  come  between  the  noun  and  article,  the  noun  to  which  the  indetinite 
article  belongs,  is  plural ;  as,  "  a  few  meu,"  "  a  great  many  men." 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  The  bird  pes  swiftly:' 

360.  The  is  a  dti:finite  article,  and  belongs  to  bird, 
according  to  Rule  KI. 

Bird  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  common  GE^^DEF,  the  third 
PERSON,  SINGULAR  NUMBER,  and  in  the  N03IINATIVE  CASE  to  fiies,. 
by  Rule  VI. 

Flies  is  an  active  intransitive  verb,  indicative  mood, 
PRESENT  tense — "  1.  I  fly;  2.  You  fly;  3.  He  ilies,  or  bird 
flies" — made  in  the  third  person,  singular,  and  agrees 
with  bird,  by  Rule  VII. 

Swiftly  is  an  adverb,  qualifying  flies,  by  Rule  IX. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

<*  The  boys  have  arrived  seasonably,"  "  Children  attend  the  school." 

"  Galileo  invented  the  telescope."'  "  "William  lounded  a  university." 

"  The  boy  had  an  ulcer."  "  The  grass  is  green." 

"  WiUiam  gave  an   historical   account  "  Farmers  carry  hay  into  the  barn." 

(1.)  of  the  transaction."  "  The     good     scholar    obeys    his   in- 
''  Cohimbiis  discovered  the  continent  of         structor." 

America." 

(l.j  Apply  Rule  Ylil. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  47 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  A*D  CORRECTED: 
''He  had  a  ulcer'' 
3G1.  Incorrect,  because  we  use  an  before  a,  vowel,  except 
u  long:  a  should,  therelore,  be  on;  thus,  "an  ulcer." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED,  CONTINUED. 
"  A  enemy  approaches."  "  Three  barley-corns  makfe  a  inch." 

*'  James  procured  a  inkstand."  "  Eight  drams  make  a  ounce." 

"  He  conferred  a  honor."  "  They  formed  an  union." 

"  An   unit  figure   occupies  the  lowest     "  He  quuted  an  hard  saying.'^ 
place  in  whole  numbers."  "  Thomas  has  lost  an  horse'." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

362.  Will  you  write  down  two  sentences,  using  in  one  the  definite,  and  in  the 
other  the  indefinite  article?  One,  containing  a  correctly  used  before  w  lono-? 
One,  h-iving  a  definite  article  correctly  used  before  the  consonant  h  P 

Will  you  write  two  nouns,  the  names  of  difieront  things  in  the  school-room? 
Two,  the  names  of  ditiereut  cities  ':•  One  sentence,  having  a  proper  noun  used 
us  a  common  noun  "i 


XXX.  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

003.  An  Adjective  is  a  word  joined  to  a  noun,  to  describe 
or  define  it ;  as,  "  An  obedient  son.'' 

304.  In  English,  an  adjective  is  varied  only  to  express 
the  degrees  of  comparison.  There  are  three  degrees  of 
comparison — the  positive,  the  comparative,  and  the  super- 
lative. 

365.  The  positive  degree  simply  describes  an  object ;  as, 
*'  John  is  good.'" 

36G.  The  comparative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the 
positive  in  meaning  ;  as,  "  William  is  better  than  John."  It 
implies  a  comparison  between  two. 

3G7.  The  superlative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the 
positive  to  the  highest  or  lowest  degree ;  as,  "Thomas  is 
the  best ;"  "  Walter  is  the  worsty 

368.  It  implies  a  comparison  between  three  or  more. 

360.  The  simple  word,  or  positive,  if  a  monosyllable,  (1.)  becomes  the  com- 
parative by  adding  r  or  er,  and  the  superlative  by  adding  st  or  ed,  to  the  end  of 
It ;  as,  ivke,  wiser,  tvisest ;  great,  greater,  greatest. 

370.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  th.e  comparison  is  usually  made  by 
placing  the  adverbs  more  and  most  before  the  positive  ;  as,  benevolent,  more  benevo- 
lent, 9)60st  benevolent. 

371.    The  comparison  is  sometimes  formed  by  the  adverbs  less  and  least ;  as, 
^vise,  less  idse,  least  wise. 

372.  Dissyllables  (2.)  ending  in  y  /  as,  liar^py,  lovely,  and  in  le,  after  a  mute  ; 
(3.)  as,  ahlc,  ample,  or  accented  on  the  last  syllable;  as,  discreet,  polite,  easily  ad-' 

(1.)  A  word  of  one  syllable.  (2.)  A  word  of  two  syllables. 

(3.)  b,  i-,2^,  t,  and  c  and  g  hard,  are  mutes. 


43  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

mit  of  er  ?.nd  est ;  as,  happier,  lioppiM  ;  alia)',  aV.s^t,  ic.  Words  of  more  than 
two  syllables  hardly  c\'cr  udmit  ot  these  tcrmin:itious. 

373.  In  some  words,  the  superlative  is  formed  by  adding  the  adverb  moit  to 
the  end  ot  them  ;  as,  nethermost,  uttermost,  'Uppermost. 

374  Some  adjectives,  having  in  themselves  a  superlative  signification,  da 
not  admit  of  comi^arison  ;  as,  extreme,  perfect,  right,  ivrowj,  i.ijiaUc,  ceaseless, 
sujireme,  omnipotent,  itcrnal.  . 

575.  By  adding  i:Ji,  to  adjectiveis,  we  have  a  slight  degree  of  comparisoir 
bclow  the  positive ;  as,  blac'c,  htachisli ;  mlt,  saltish: 

576.  Vtrji  expresses  a  degree  of  quality,  but  not  the  highest ;  as,  "  good," 
«*t'c;'y  good." 

577  Words  used  in  counting  and  numbering  arc  called  numeral  adjectives  ; 
as,  o«i,  iv:o,  thrm ;  first,  secoud,  third.    These  adjectives  are  not  compraed. 

's78  Vn  adjective  put  without  a  noun,  v/itli  the  definite  article  before  it,  be- 
comes a  noun  in  seuse'and  meaning,  and  may  be  considered  as  such  m  parsing; 
as,  "  Providence  rewards  the  (/ood,  and  punishes  the  bad. 

RUIiB    IV. 

Adjectives  helong  to  the  nouns  which  they  describe. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
''John  is  sincere. ^^ 
379.  John  is  a  rEOPER  noun,  cf  the  thisd  pebson,  singular 

KUMBEE,  MASCULINE  GEl.-DIIB,  aild  ill  the  NOMINATIVE  CASE,  tO  16', 

by  Rule  VI. 

Is  is  a  NEUTER  VEKT],  ill  the  INETCATIVE    MOCI>,  PRESENT  TENSE 

«'  1.  I  am  :  2.  Ycu  arc  ;  3.  He  cr  John  if^,"' — made  in  the 

THIRD  PERSON  SINGULAR,  aiid  agTces  wiUi  John,  according  to 
Rule  Vll. 

Sincere  is  an  adjective, — "  shicere,  more  sincere,  most 
sincere," — made  in  the  positive  degree,  and  belongs  to  John, 
by  Rule  IV. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

"  You  are  studious  "  One  man  has  come." 

"John  is  more  fatnclious."  "  Two  men  have  departed." 

"  William  is  most  studious."  "  Twenty  men  will  sail." 

"Mary  is  intelligent."  "James  v/rote   his  name  on  the  first 

"James  is  active."  page." 

"  Thomas  is  less  active."  "  Here  comes  a  great  man." 

"  Charles  is  happv."  "  Here  comes  a  greater  man." 

"  Mary  is  tall.    Susan  is  taller."  "  Here  comes  the.  greatest  man." 

"  No  com.position  is  perfect."  "  The  first  Ilect  contained  five  hundred 

*'  Religion  makes  its  votaries  happy."  meii," 


XXXI. 
^SO.  Double  coHiparatives  and  superlatives,   since  they 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAE.  49 

add  nothing  to  the  sense,  should  be  avoided  ;  as,  worser 
?nore'w'iser,  &c ;  also,  lesser,  supremest,  most  infinite^  &;c. 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Q.  Will  you  write  down  two  sentences,  each  colitainiug  a  different  adject've 
in  the  positive  degree?  Two,  with  adjectives  iu  the  coriipuriitiTe  degree?  Two 
with  adjectives  in  the  superlative  degree? 

Q.  Will  you  supply  such  adjectives  in  the  followinp:  sentences  as  will  make 
sense?  "A' — uoy  studies  his  Icssou."  "A  boy  deserves  punish- 
ment."   *'  A  man  helps  t!ie man."    "  ^Merchants  own .«hips."     "  The- 

instructor  loves scholars."     "  William  is.a scholar,  Kui'us  is  a 

one,  but  Thomas  is  the one  that  I  ever  saw." 


XXXII.    OF  PRONOUNS. 

*i81.  A  PRONOUN  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun,  to 
avoid  a  disagreeable  repetition  of  the  noun. 

S82.  A  PERSONAL  PRONOUN  IS  SO  Called,  because  it  invari- 
ably represents  the  same  person.  There  are  live  personal 
pronouns — I,  tiiou  or  you,  he,  she,  it.  They  have  person, 
number  and  case,  like  nouns;  and  those  oi"  the  third  per- 
ijoii  have  gender  cilso. 

-.383.  /  is  the  ftrst  person,  ihou  the  second,  he,  sJic,  or  if,  the 
third.     He  is  masculine,  she  is  feminine,  and  it  is  neuter. 

384.  Pronouns,  like  nouns,  have  three  cases — the  nomi- 
native, the  possessive,  and  the  objective;  and  two  numbers 
— the  singular  and  plural. 

885,  Mine  and  t7iir(-<i,  instead  of  mi/  ai)d  -f-hi/,  vyere  formerly  used  in  the 
solemn  style,  before  nouns  and  adjectives  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h;  as, 
*'  JBlot  out  all  mine  iniquities." 


-O 


XXXIII.   COMPOUND  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

386.  Compound  personal  pronouns  are  formed  by  adding 
the  Avord  se/f,  in  the  plural  selves,  to  the  simple  pronouns"; 
as,  himself,  themselves,  &c. 

PERSOX.  CASE.  SINGITLAU,  PI.rilAL. 

Fird;  Norn,  Jlyself,  Ourselves*. 

Poss,  Wardimj.  . 

Olj.  Myself,  Ourselves. 

Stcond.  yom.  Thyself,  or ) 


Yourself,     )' 

POf:S. 

Ohj.  Thyself,  or  { 

Yourself,     )' 


Yourselves. 


Yourselves, 


50  ENGLISH  GRAMMAS. 

r>drd. 


Pant 

Himself, 

ThemscivfeiS. 

Oiyj. 
Aiw? . 
/b«. 
Oh;. 
Xo-jn. 

Obj. 

Himself, 
Herself, 

Themselves. 
Themselrca. 

Herself, 
Itself, 

ThemseUes. 
Themflelves. 

Itself, 

Themselves. 

RULB  V. 

Pronouns  must  agree  with  the  nouns  for  which  they  stand  in 
gender,  number,  and  'person.    . 

EXEKCISE3  IN  SYNTAX. 

**  John  found  his  hnifey 
387.  John  is  a  proper  noun,  of  the  masculine  gender,  the 

THIRD     PERSON,     SINGULAR     NUMBER,     aild     NOMINATIVE     CASE    XO 

found,  by  Rule  VI. 

Found  is  an  active-tranfitive  verb,  in  the  indicative  mood, 
IMPERFECT  TENSE — "1.  I  fouiicl ;  2.  You  founc] ;  3,  He  or 
John  found" — made  in  the  third  person  singular,  and 
agrees  with  John,  b}^  Rule  YII. 

His  is  a  personal  pronoun,  of  the  third  person  singular, 
masculine  gender,  and  agrees  with  John,  according  to  Rule 
V. ;  in  the  possessive  case,  and  governed  b}-  knife,  by  Rule  I. 

Knife  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  third  pehson  singular, 
NEUTEu  gender,  the  Objective  case,  and  governed  by  founds 
according  to  Rule  yiil. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

1. 

**  James  obtained  his  request."  "  Ye  despise  repro&f." 

"  I  will  assist  you."  "  They  mend  their  pens." 

"  He  will  receive  his  reward."  *'  Mary  tore  her  handkerchief." 

"She  misuj^ed  him."  "Virtue  has  its  reward." 

*'  Siu  ruias  its  vuiaries."'  "  She  deceived  them."    ~ 

2. 

*'  An  indulp;cnt  father  will  reprove  his    "John  is  ia  distress,  and  I  will  assist 

son  wiien  (1.)  he  deserves  it."  him." 

**  A  diifiiVd  son  gladdens  the  hearts  of    "  I  fourul  Mary  and  her  mother  in  trou* 
Lis  parents."  Lie,  and  (2.)  comforted  (-3.)  them." 

EXERCISES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 
Q.     Will  TOii  compose  tv/o  sentences,  each  having  a  different  personal  pro^ 
Boun  of  the  larst  person?     One,  having  a  pronoun  of  the  first  person  plural? 

(1.)  Adverb.  (2.)  Conjunction.  (3.)  Apply  Kul?  XL 


Ill  ghammar.  51 

Q.  WiJl  yen  fill  up  the  followirs;  senteuces  with  suitable  prononn*,  so  as  to 
rnuke  sense  ?  "  —  lost  my  hat,  but  iourid  —  ag;ain."  "  Let  Harriet  hare  —  book, 
for  —  will  need  —  to  get'her  lesson."  "  The  travelers  lost  —  way,  and  the  boys 
conducted  —  to  —  homes." 

Q.  'Will  you  fill  up  the  following  broken  sentences  with  suitable  words  to 

make  sense  ?     "  Intemperance evil."     "  Washington  — .—  of  his ." 

*'  Cohunbus America."     "  Shreveport inhabitants."     "  The 

cccan  is miles  wide."     " first  man." 


XXXIV.    OF  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

?S8.  In  the  sentence,  "  Both  wealth  and  poverty  are  temptations ;  iJiat  tends 
to  excite  ]>ridc,  iMt  discontent;"  you  perceive  that  the  word  t/tat  represents 
wealth,  and  the  word  fhis  poverty.  T?iis  and  i/iat  do,  therefore,  resemble  pro- 
nouns, and  may,  for  this  reason,  be  called  pronouns. 

;jSC>.  '\Yhen  I  say,  ''This  house  is  mine,  that  barn  is  yours,"  the  words  tuit 
jind  t/iat  arc  joined  to  nouns  like  adjectives,  to  define  or  specify  them  :  they  may, 
ou  thia  account,  be  called  adjectives. 

SGO.  Adjective  pronouns,  then,  are  words  that  resemble 
l.)Otli  pronouns  and  adjectives.  These  pronouns  r?re  some- 
times called  pronominal  adjectives,  or  sped  Tying:  adjectives. 

301.  The  ADjRCTivK  rroxouNs  may  be  divided  into  three 
sort.s — the  distributive,  the  demonstrative,  and  the  indefinite. 

292.  The  distribulive  are  those  that  relate  to  persona 
or  things,  taken  separately  and  singly. 

393.    DISTRIBUTIVE  (1.)  PKONOU^'S. 
Each,  EVERr,  eitiiek,  and  souiclimes  neither. 

?.94.  Each  relates  to  two  or  more  persons  or  things,  taken  separatCi'y;  as 
'•  Each  of  his  brothers  is  doing  well."  '      ' 

395.    Every  relates  to  several  persons  or  things,  and  signifies  each  one  of 
them,  taken  separately;  as,   "  Ever]/  man  must  account  for  himself." 

3^1?.     EiTHEii  relates  to  two  persons  or  things  only,  taken  separately    nr. 
signiiies  tlie  one  or  tiie  other;  as,  "I  have  not  seeu'ttY/ier."    ilence    to' sav 


Either  of  the  three,"  is  incorrect. 


d 
to  say. 


3i.)T.    Neither  means  not  either  ;  that  is,  not  one  nor  the  other;  ae,  " Neiih^ 
of  my  friends  was  there." 

•  398.  The   DEMONSTRATIVE  (2.)  PRONOUNS  are  those  which  pre- 
cisely poiut  out  the  things  to  which  they  relate. 

S99.    DEMONSTRATIVE  PR0X0UN3. 

Sing.  '  Plu. 

Tins,  TirssE. 

That,  Those. 

Former,  ,  Former. 

Latter,  Latter. 


'1.)  So  called  from  distrihuU,  to  divide  amoiiQ  ■^i'>:eral. 
[■2.)  So  called  from  demonftraU,  to pi'ovt  or  thoio  prcciieiy. 


52  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

400.  This  and  these  refer  to  the  nearest  person  or  things,— ^/ic/  and  ihoa  to 
the  most  distant;  as,  "  Thnte  gloves  are  superior  to  those.''  "  Both  wealth  and 
poverty  are  temptations;  that  tends  to  excite  pride,  this  discontept." 

401.  The  INDEFINITE  are  those  that  refer  to  things  in  an  indefi- 
nite or  general  manner. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

402.  Some,  other,  any,  one,  all,  such,  none.  Of  these  pro- 
nouns, one  and  other  are  dccjined  like  nouns.  Another  is  declined 
in  tlie  singular,  but  it  wants  the  plural. 


Sinri. 

Plu. 

40-1. 

Xom. 
Posh. 

Other, 

Other's, 

Other, 

Sm'j. 

Others. 
Others'. 
Others. 
Plu. 

40i. 

Pom. 
Ohj. 

One, 

One's, 

One, 

Oue,^. 
Ones'. 
Ones. 

We  snr,   "  This 

book," 

but. 

"  These  books;' 

also, 

"0 

ne  man,"  ' 

men :"  hence. 

Twenty 

40.5.  Note  I.  Adjective  pronouns  and  numerals  must 
agree  in  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"  These  two  books  belong  to  meT 

406.  These  is  an  adjective  pronoun  of  the  demonstrative  kind, 
in  the  plural  number,  and  belono-s  to  hooks,  accordinir  to  Note  I. 

■    Two  is  a  numeral  adjective,  and  belongs  to  books,  by  Note  I. 
Books,  belong,  &c.  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 

"  Every  man  performs  his  part  in  crea-  "  These   men  might  remain  with  us." 

tioD."  "  Those   men  make  many  pretences  to 

"  Each  man  arrived  at  his  station."  religion." 

*'  Either  part}'  can  repair  the  injury."  "  All  rational  beings  desire  happiness." 

"  Some  persons  cannot  acquire  vv'ealth."  "By   appljcation   almost   any  boy  may 

"Many  people  obtain uichcsvvith  ap-  acquire  an  honorable  rank  in  his 

parently  little  exertion."  class." 

"  One  boy  labors  for  his  improvement."  "Good  and  virtuous  men  will,  sooner 

"  This  man  neglects  his  affairs."  (1.)   or  later  (1.),   attain  to  happi- 
ness." 

"  T/ie  old  bird  feeds  hei-  young  ones.^' 

407.  Ones  is  an  indefinite  pronoun,  representing  birds;  in  the 
common  gender,  third  person  plural,  in  the  objective  case,  and 
governed  by  feeds,  agreeably  to  Rule  VIII. 


(1.)  Adverb, 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  5.1 

EXERCISES  IX  SYXTAX  CONTINUED. 

"  One  boy  influences  many  others."  others   spend  their  time   in   idleness; 

*' None  act  their  part  too  well."  the    former    will    receive    praise,   the 

"  Some  scholars   study   diligently  ;  latter  censure.'' 

We   cannot  say,   '' Thqm   run,"   but,    "They  run:"   hence, 

Note  II.  When  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  the  subject  of  the 
verb,  it  should  be  in  the  nominative  case. 

It  is  very  common  for  persons  in  conversation  to  say,  "Them  books,'' 
"Them  knives,"  &c.  instead  of  "Those  books."  "  Those  knives,"  <tc.  The 
incorrectness  here  alluded  to  consists  in  substituting  a  personal  in  the  place  of 
an  adjective  pronoun:  hence, 

Note  III.  The  pronoun  Thejn  should  not. be  used  in  the 
place  of  these  or  those. 

SENTENCES  TO  pE  WRITTEN. 

Q.  Will  you  compose  two  sentences,  each  having  a  difierent  adjective  pro- 
noun? One,  having  a  demonstrative  pronoun  V  Cue,  having  an  indelinite  pi  o- 
uoun  used  as  a  noun  V 

'  Q.  Will  you  fill  up  wit]i  pronouns  suitable  to  make  sense  the  following; 
phrases?  "  "NS'hen  Harriet  found  —  book,  —  tore  — ,  and  then  tlung  —  away." 
"  —  man  likes  —  farm,  —  merchandise." 

Q.  Will  you  compose  a  proper  example  under  Rule  T.  ?  One  under  Ivulo  II.  ? 
Rule  III.?     Rule  IV.?     Rule  V.?     Rule  VI.? 


XXXV.  OF  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

403.  In  the  sentence,  "  That  man  is  hapT\v,  who  lives  viituously,"  the  word 
iriio  is  a  ])roiK)nn,  becuase  it  stands  for  a  noun  ( the  noim  man),  and  it  is  a  rt;lativ<i, 
because  it  relates  or  refers  to  this  noun  in  the  same  sentence :  hence, 

409.  A  relative  pronoun  is  a  word  that  usually  stands  for 
some  noun  before  it  in  the  same  sentence, 

410.  There  ar(3  three  relative  pronouns,  viz. 

411.  Who,  wnicii,  and  that. 

412.  Who  is  used  in  speaking  of  persons  ;  as,  "The  man 
who  came." 

413.  Which  is  used  in  speaking  of  animals  or  things  ;  as, 
"  The  bird  which  sings,"  '•  The  tree  which  I  planted." 

414.  Which,  however,  is  used  in  speaking  of  persons,  when  we  wi.sh  to  dis- 
tinguish one  of  two-individuals,  or  a  i)articuliir  person  among  many  others;  as, 
"  Which  of  the  two  is  he?"     "  Which  of  them  has  gone?" 

415.  That,  as  a  relative,  is  often  used,  in  speaking  either 
of  persons  or  things,  in  the  place  of  who  or  which;  a.s, 

"  The  boy  that  reads,"  or,  "  The  boy  who  reads ;"  "  The  bird  that  flew,"  or, 
"  The  bird  which  flew  ;'  "  The  bench  that  was  made,"  or,  "  The  beach  which 
wi^s  made." 

Thnt  is  used  in  preference  to  who  or  ichicJi,  in  the  following  cases : — 
1.    In  speaking  both  of  persons  and  things  ;  as,  **  The  man  and  the  beast  thnt 
I  saw,  perished."  ^ 


51  ENGLISH  GPtAMMAIl. 

5.     In  speaking  of  children;  as,  "  The-  child  that  I  met." 

3.  After  the  adjective  same;  as,  '*  Ilo  is  the  same  man  that  we  saw  vest«r- 
4av." 

4.  After  tlic  superlative  degree;  ns,  "He  is  the  wisest  man  that  the  world 
pvcr  produced." 

5.  After  the  relative  wJio ;  as,  "  "Who  that  reflects." 

415 — 1.  ExcspTiox.  That,  as  a  relative,  cannot  take  the  preposition  imme- 
diately before  it;  as,  "  lie  is  the  sr.mc  man  with  that  you  are  acquainted."  For 
toUh,  that,  read  toiih  whom.  It  is  romrrkablc,  however,  that,  when  the  arran^u- 
nient  is  a  little  varied,  tho  word  that  admits  the  preposition;  as,  "He  is  the 
Bame  man  i/iat  you  were  acquaintod  vvith." 

41,3—1.  We  can  say,  "  The  man  who,"  or  "  The  men  who,"  using  the  relative 
v)ho  iu  speaking  either  of  one  inua  or  more  than  one  :  loho,  then,  is  of  both  pum- 
bers,  and  is  thus  declined  : 


SivguJar. 

Plural. 

Mm. 

Who, 

Who. 

lUs. 

Whose, 

Who?c. 

Ohj. 

Whom, 

Whom. 

417.  Which  and  that  are  of  holli  numbers,  but  they  arc  not  declined,  except 
that  v:ho?e  is  sometimes  used  as  the  possessive  case  of  which  ;  as,  "  Is  there  an/ 
oiiier  doctrine  whose  followers  arc  punished  V" 

41^.  Tf/ww,  used  in  tie  manner  last  described,  is  made  to  represent  thre« 
words;  as,  "  Philosophy  whose  end,"  "for  the  cud  of  which." 

41'>.     Antecedent  signifies  goinff  h'lfore. 

420.  The  noun  or  pronpun  which  goes  before  the  relative,  and  to  which  th» 
relative  refers,  is  therefore  called  the  amecedent  of  the  relative;  as,  "John, 
who  has  gone."    Here,  John  is  the  antreccucut  of  who. 

421.  When  you  are  told  that  tvho,  which,  and  tJiat  are  relatives,  you  should 
not  get  the  impres.sion  that  the  last  two  are  always  relatives  ;  for  tk^^it  is  a  rela- 
five^only  wiicn  it  is  used  in  the  sense  of  zc/w  or  {(.'/-■icA/  that  is,  w.oen  ?<v/o  or 
'whIcJi  may  be  used  in  its  place,  without  destroying  the  sense  i  as,  "  Here  is  tim 
knife  that  I  found,"  which  can  be  altered  to  "llcre  is  the  knife  which  I  found," 
without  injury  to  the  sense. 

422.  7'/'/-a/.,  when  it  point.'?  out  or  specifies  some  particular  person  or  thing, 
;s  reckoned  an  adjective  pronoun.  When  not  used  as  a  relative,  nor  as  an  ad- 
jective prououn,  it  is  reckoned  a  conjunction;  as,  "He  studies  that  he  ma/ 
iearn." 

42:5.  Hence  it  appears  tliat  the  word  that  may  be  used  sometimes  as  a  rela- 
tive pronoun,  sometimes  as  an  adjective  pronoun,  and  sometimes  as  a  conjuntion. 

424.  Since  relative  pronouns  stand  for  nouns,  as  well  as  personal  pronouns, 
they  should  therefore  agree  with  nouns  in  the  same  particulars  and  by  the  same 
rule,     RuLS!  V.  will  therefore  apply  to  both. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

**  I'hat  vian  is  happij  loho  lives   virtuously.''^ 

425.  That  is  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  of  the  singular  number, 
and  belongs  to  man,  by  Note  I. 

Wrio  is  a  relative  pronoun,  of  the  masculine  gender,  third^ 
pTDUoON  singular,  and  agrees  with  raan,  by  Rule  Y.  It  is  in  the 
KOMiSATiVE  CA:?E  to  llves,  accoi'ding  to  Rule  VI. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 


'J  J 


*'  That  man  is  fortunate  who  escapes  "  I  met  the  same  man  in  the  mar3;et 

censure."  to-day  (l.j,  that  I  met  yesterday  in 

*'  The  girl  whom  I  saw,  perished."  the  street. 

*'  You,   who  came  lirst,   should   retire  "  That  hou.«e,  which  stands  on  ths  hill, 

first."  once  (1.)  belonged  to  nie." 

*' You    taught    the   boy   whose   hat   I  "The    boy   whom    I    instruct    learns 

found."  well." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  The  man  which  I  saw." 
426.    Incorrect ;  because,   in   spoakinf^   of  persons,  ivho^ 
whose,  or  lohom  is  generally  to  be  used.     It  should  therefore, 
read  "  The  man  whom  I  saw." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED,  CONTINUED. 

*'  The  bird  whom  I  killed  had  made  "  Thou  who  are  in  pro.^perity  must 
her  nest."  assist  me  in  adversity." 

"The  man  which  visited  me  has  left  "He  which  siinu.s  vice" does  generally 
town."  practice  virtue." 

''That  man  is  happy  whom  is  vir-  "I,  who  lives  by  your  charity,  should 
luous."  be  grateful." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Q.  Will  you  construct  a  sentence  containing  the  relative  icho  ?  One,  con- 
taining uVuVa..^     One,  coni&\mr\g  that  P 

Q.     Will  you  fill  up  the  following  sentences  with  relatives  correctly  used? 

•'  The  man  -^—  sins  shall  die."     "  The  .boy studie:;i  will  learn."     "  The  bird 

sung  so  sweetly  has  flown."     Will  you  fill  up  the  following  v.-ith  one  or  moro 

Avords  that  will  make  sense?     "  Intemperance  -^^ evils."    "  If truth 

sorry." 

Q.  Will  you  embrace  in  difTerent  sentences,  each  of  the  following  words? 
Wo^shingtori*  Columbus,  Captain  Cool:,  Indians,  Wisdom,  liichis,  James  Monroe. 


XXXVI.    OP    COMPOUND    AND    INTERROGATIVE 

PRo:>;ouNS. 

427.     "  1  took  w7^C('.  yon   gave   me." 

"  I  took  that  wJiich  you   gaA'^e  me." 

"  I  took  the  thing  which  you  gave   mo." 

"  I  took  those  things  which  you  gave  me.", 
423.  By  examining  the  foregoing  sentences,  you  will  see  that  the  word 
what,  in  the  first  example,  means  the  same  as  the  v»ords  in  itaiics  in  the  succes- 
sive ones:  the  word  ivhat,  then,  is  clearly  a  pronoun;  and  because  it  stands  for 
more  than  one  word,  it  is  called  a  coinpour.d  pronoun.  The  word  before  tho 
relative  tvhich,  in  the  phrase  "  that  which,'"  or  "  ihe  thmg  which,"  is  the  antece- 
dent of  which.     Hence, 

429.  What  is  a  compound  relative  pronoun,  includin,^ 
both  the'  antecedent  and.  the  relative,  and  is  generally 
equivalent  to  that  wiiicn. 

(1.)  Adverb. 
'^  Thus,  "  Washington  was  a  true  patriot,"  <&c.     Thejwpil  may  rcviU  Ki^e^-d  sen. 


56  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

430.  Who,  whl'.h;  and  what  have  isomotimes  the  words  ictr  or  soectr  annexed 
{\.)  to  them  :  and  each  combination  of  this  sort  is  called  a  compound  relative  > 
as,  whoever,  ivJiosoevev,  whichet'er,  u-hivhsatve/-,  &c.    They  are  not  often  nsed. 

4?.l.  Who,  v:hich,  a.nd' ivJtat  are  called  interrogativef?,  or  relatives  of  the  irv 
terroijative  kind,  when  they  are  used  in  askina:  questions;  as,  "Who  is  he?" 
*'  Which  is  the  book  V"  "  What  are  you  doinuj  V"  These  relatives,  you  perceive, 
have  no  antecedents,  but  relate  to  some  word  or  phrase  contained  in  the  answer^ 
v^-hich  is  called  a  subsequent,  because  it  follows  after  the  relative;  as,  "  Whom 
did  you  see "?"     Aus.  "John."    Here  Joh/i,  is  the  subsequent  to  which  whom  refers. 

43-2.  Hence  it  follows,  that  antecedent  and  silhsetpient  are  opposed  to  each  other 
in  meaning;  the  former  signifying  going  before,  the  latteT /olLiving  aftir. 

4;i3.  Wheiler  was  formerly  made  use  of  to  express  interrogation;  as, 
"  Whether  of  these  shall  I  choose  V"  but  it  is  now  seldom  used,  the  interrogative 
which  supplying  its  place. 

4S4,  Which,  ivluit,  and,  as  we  have  already  seen,  that,  Avhen  joined  to  nouns, 
are  adjective  pronouns;  as,  "  unto  which  promise  our  twelve  tribes." 

435.  When  tchat  and  vjhich  are  joined  to  nouns  in  asking  questions,  they 
are  called  interrogative  adjective  pronouns;  as,  '•  Which  horse  did  he  take?" 

430..  In  some  instances,  we  tind  what  used  in  the  sense  of  au  interjection  j*^ 
as,  "  What!  take  my  money,  and  then  my  life?" 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"/  will  leave  what  is  useless^ 

457,  Vv^hat,  in  the  example  above,  means  the  same  as,  "  that  which,"  or, 
"  the  thing  which  ;"  we  will,  therefore,  in  parsing  i\.,  bear  in  mind  that  it  has  the 
government  and  agreement  of  two  separate  words.  We  will  first  parse  it  as 
standing  for  thing,  and  secondly  for  which. 

What  is  a  co?<ipound  relative  pronoun,  and  is  equivalent 
to  "that  which,"  or,  "the  thing  which."  In  representing 
thing,  it  may  be  considered  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person 
SINGULAR,  NEUTER  GENDER,  in  the  OBJECTIVE  CASE,  and  govemcd 
b\'  leave,  according  to  Rule  Vlll. 

What,  in  representing  which,  may  be  considered  a  rela- 
tive   PRONOUN    of  the    THIRD    PERSON  SINGULAR,  NEUTER  GENDER, 

and  relates  to  thing  for  its  antecedent,  according  to  Rule 
V.  and  in  the  nojminativjs  case  to  is,  by  Rule  VI. 

Is  is  a  NEUTER  VERB,  in  the  indicative  mood,  present  tense 
-—"  1.  I  am;  2.  You  are;  3.  He  or  whiclL  is" — made  in  the 
THIRD  PERSON  SINGULAR,  and  agrccs  with  which,  the  relative 
part  of  the  pronoun  what^  according  to  Rule  VII. 

V.seless  is  an  adjective,  in  the  positive  degree,  and  belongs 
to  what,  by  Rule  iV. 

EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

"  James  will  do  what  is  proper."  "  William  demands  what  I  cannot  give." 

\\  You  heard  what  I  said."  "  They  advocate  what  is  excellent." 

"'  Whatever  improves  delights  him."' 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  57 

XXXVII.  OF  THE  VERB. 

43iS.  A  vEpn  is  a  \vord  that  expresses  action  or  being. 
Verbs  are  of  three  kinds — active,  tassive,  and  ^'£UTEI^. 

439.  All  active  veib  expresses  action,  and  the  actor  is 
always  I  he  nominative  case  ;  as,  "John  rans."  Active  verbs 
are  either  transitive  or  intransitive. 

440.  An  active  verb  is  transitive,  when  it  citlior  hns  or 
may  have  an  object  after  it,  on  wlilch  the  action  tcrarlnates  ; 
as,  ''John  beats  Wiiiiam." 

441.  An  active  verb  is  intransitive,  when  it  neither  has 
nor  can  have  an  object  after  it. 

442.  Passive  means  suffering  or  7'eceiving. 

44.3.  AVhba  I  say,  "John  is  beaten  by  William,"  is  beaten  is  a  rerb,  bccauso 
it  expresses  action  ;  ivnd  it  is  a  passive  verb,  because  it  c:;picsses  the  uclioa 
received  by  John;  iiud  it"  John  receiver  the  action,  then  he  la  tlie  object  of  it: 
heuce, 

444.  A  passive  verb  expresses  action  or  efFect  received, 

445.  The  object  is  always  its  subject  or  nominative  case. 

446.  Active  nominative,  or  ac'or,  "Jolin  sti'ikes  William.*' 

447.  Passive  nominattDe  or  ohjfct,  "  Wiiham  is  struck  by 
John." 

448.  By  examining  the  forcgioi'ng  examples,  yon  will  sec  that  when  the  rerb 
is  active,  its  uoniinutive  is  likewise  active;  und  Vheu  the  verb  is  passive,  \Vs 
nominative  is  liicewise  passive. 

449.  The  passive  voice  is  a  convenient  mode  of  expression  on  occasions  wlicn 
Tve  wish  to  state  ■ivhat  luis  been  doie,  witliout  e>;posiiig  tue  i.ulliur  ;  Hhih,  instead 
Of  snyitig,  "  William  struck  John,"  i  can,  to  avoid  allcding  to  W  illiaui,  ^ay, 
*'  John  was  struck." 

450.  A  ntiiiior  verb  is  one  tliat  is  neither  active  nor  pas- 
sive, expressing  simply  v.\\\\cy  bf.ing  or  existence  in  a  cer- 
tain state,  as,  "  IJe  az^I-,"  "^^^  ''<  ^'^  home." 

xxxviii  MOOD,  Oil  modi:. 

451.  Mood,  or  ?joue,  is  the  manner  .of  reprocenti::g  action 
or  being. 

452.  The  iNDic  xTivc  mood  is  used  simply  for  ir.dieatlng  or 
declai'inir  a  thing,  or  asking  a  qucsuon  ;  ;is,  "I  v.'^a!;;"   '-Do 

]  walk  r 

453.  The  poten-'tal  mood  is  used  for  expressing  possibiiitv, 
liberty,  power,  wilj,  or  obliga! ion,  either  \vii,h  or  wiiheut 
asking  a  question ;  as,  "  I  may  go;"  "  iUay  I  goV  '•  He  must: 
read,"  &c. 


58  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR, 

454.  Of  thesuEjL'xcTivE  MOOD.  The  term  »uhJuncUve  signifies  sahjoined  or 
added  to. 

•  455.  When  I  sav,  "  I  will  go,  if  he  desire  it,"  the  phrase,  "  if  he  desire  it," 
is  added  on  to  the  one  before  it :  hence,  we  say.  "  if  he  desire  it,"  is  in  the  sub- 
junctive mood.  The  tern;,  Jrjwerer,  is  limited' to  such  sentences  r.s  sire  preceded 
by  the  conjunctions  if,  todes^,  although,  ej:cej:>v,  lest,  &c.,  which  imply  doubt  or 
some  uncertainty. 

456.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  for  expressing  doubt 
or  uncertainty. 

457.  A  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood  may  be  expressed  in  two  different 
forms.  It  is  equally  correct  to  say,  "  If  he  is  poor,  he  is  respected,"  and,  '*  If  he 
be  studious,  he  wiirexcel."  The  verbs  he  and  is  are  both  in  the  present  tense  ; 
and  since  each  has  the  conjunction  {/"before  it,  each  is  in  the  subjunctive  uiood. 

458.  Th'e  phrase,  "  If  he  ie  studious,"  means  the  same  as,  "  If  he  will  le  stu- 
,  dious;"  it  therefore  plainly  implies  future  time. 

459.  On  the  contrary,  in  the  phrase,  "  If  he  «V  poor,"  the  sense  plainly  is, 
**If  he  is  now,  at  the  present  time,  poor,"  without  any  reference  to  future  time. 

4G0.  Hence  it  appears,  that,  in  one  form  of  the  verb,  doult  only  is  implied; 
and  in  the  other,  both  douU  and  future  time. 

401.  The  verb  ii  corresponds  with  the  common  form  of  the  verb  to  be,  in 
the  indicative  mood,  present  tense;  as,  "I  am,  you  are,  he  is:" — we  wil-,  there- 
fore, when  the  verb  is  varied  as  usual,  call  it  the  cojnr.iort  form  of  the  si;bjunctive 
mood ;  and  when  the  verb  is  not  varied  in  the  different  persons,  we  will  call  it  the 
s^d'jnnctlve  form,  since  this  form  is  peculiar  to  this  mood.  You  should  here  be 
informed  that  this  distinction  relates  only  to  the  present  tense,  it  being  customary 
to  vary  the  terminations  of  the  verb  in  the  remaining  tenses,  as  usual. 

462.  The  foUov/ing  general  rules  will  direct  yoit  in  the  proper  use  of  tlie  sub- 
junctive mood  : 

463.  When  any  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  present 
tense,  has  a  reference  to  future  time,  we  should  use  the 

SUBJUXCTIYE  FORM. 
Present   Tense. 

464.  Singula!-.  Plu.rcd. 

1.  If  I  love.  1.  If  v.'c  love. 

2.  If  thou  or  you  love.  2.  If  ye  or  you  love. 
S.  If  he  love.                                              3.  If  they  love. 

465.  When  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  present 
tense,  has  no  reference  to  future  time,  v/e  should  use  the 

COMMON  FOllM. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  If  Hove.  1.  If  we  love. 

2.  If  thou  lovest,  or  ]  2.  If  ye  love,  o>  ) 
If  you  lore.           )'  If  you  love,    f 

S.  If  "he  loves.  .  S.  If  they  love. 

4'5u.  Other  conjunctions,  besides  r/",  arc  used  before  the  subjimctive  mood. 
7,^ is  perhaps  used  most  frequently,  because  it  implies  doubt  more  strongly  than 
most  others. 

467.  By  the  foregoing,  you  may  perceive  that  when  the  verb  is  in  the  sub- 
junctive for?ii,  some  auxiliary  verbis  always  understood;  as,  "  He  will  not  be 
pardoned  unless  he  repent,"  "that  is,  "unless  he  will  repent;"  "If  thou  ever 
Return,  thou  shouldst  he  thankful,"  that  is,   "  if  thou  shouldst  ever  return." 

4.68.    A  verb  in  the  indicative  mood  is  converted  into  the  subjunctive,  com- 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  39 

.nic?i  form,  siiriply  bj"  placing  a  coujunctiou,  irnplAang  dov.bt,  before  it;  as,  "I 
wr.ik,"  the  indicative  i3aood,""becomes  subjunctive'bv"'prelixiag  *//  thus,  *'If  I 
walk," 

469.  In  like  manner,  a  verb  in  the  potential  maybe  changed  to  the  subjunc-. 
tive;  as,  "  I  can  go,"  is  the  potential;  "  If  I  can  go,"  tbi\su]jjanctive. 

470.  Of  the  iMPgRATivu  Aioou.  When  I  say,  "John,  n^ind  .your  book,"  I 
conjm^ftad  John  to  do  something,  and  because  imperative  means  coramundiiL'j,  w« 
cay  that  wind,  in  the  phrase  above,  is  in  the  imperative  toood. 

471.  This  mood,  for  reasons  assigned  before,  (i'll-,)  embraces  the  following 
particulars : 

1.  Comrrukid ;  as,   ".John,  sit  i-.p." 

2.  Etitreat'j :  as,  "  Do  visit  rac." 

8,  Exliorting  ;  as,  "  Remember  my  counsel." 
4.  Fennittinff /  0.5,  "Go  in  peace." 

472.  The  imperative  mood,  then,  is  used  for  commanding, 
■entreating,  exhorting,  or  permitting. 

473.  The  application  of  this  mood  is  limited  to  the  second  person  ;  as  "'  John, 
f.ome  to  mc;"  because,  in  uttering  a  command,  making  an  entreaty  <fec.  we  must 
Decessarilj'  address  some  one;  hence,  you  can  sec  the  reason  why  this  mood  has 
but  one  person,  viz.  the  second. 

474.  We  cannot,  witli  any  propriety,  command  a  person  to-day,  or  in  present 
time,  to  do  any  thing  in  past  time,  yesterday  for  instance ;  consequently  a  vtrb 
in  this  mood  cannot  have  any  past  tense. 

475.  When  I  command  a  person  to  do  any  'thing,  the  performance  of  the 
command  must  take  place  in  a  period  of  time  subsequent  to  that  of  the  command; 
that  is,  in  future  time  ;  but  the  command  itself  must,  from  the  very  nature  of  the 
case,  take  place  in  present  time;  this  mood,  therefore,  cannot,  strictly  speaking, 
have  any  future  tense  :  hence, 

476.  A  verb  in  the  imperative  mood  must  be  in  the  present  tense,  and  in  the 
second  person. 

477.  Of  the  iXFiNiTE  MOOD.  In  the  phrases,  "  John  begins  to  sing,"  "  Tiie 
boy:?  begin  to  sing,"  "  Thou  begiunest  to  sing,"  you  perceive  that  the  verb  to 
vii/ij  is  not  variod  to  correspond  with  the  number  and  person  of  its  different 
n^eAits,- Jok/i,  the  bovs,  and  ihott :  hence,  vo  siii(/ is  sixid  not  to  be  limited  cither 
by  person  or  number. 

478. '  This  mood,  then,  is  properly  denominated  infinitive,  signifying  vot  lim- 
ited: hence, 

470.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action  not 
limited  cither  by  person  or  number. 

4S0.  To,  the  usual  sign  of  this  mood,  is  sometimes  understood  ;  as,  "Let  me 
go,"  instead  of,  "  Let  mo  if-')  go;"  I  heard  him  say  it,"  for,  "I  heard  him  fo  say 
it."  This  little  word  to,  when  used  before  verbs  ia  this  inanner,  is  not  a  prepo- 
sition, but  forms  a  part  of  the  verb,  and,  in  parsing,  should  be  so  considered. 

481.  From  the  foregoing,  it  appears  that  there  are  five 
moods — the^indictive,  the  imperative,  the  potential,  the  sub- 
jur.cl.ive,  and  the  infinitive. 


XXXiX.  OF  TENSE.     ' 
'IS'2.  Ti\G present  tense  c:--:-  -•  •  -•  -;^-  -  ^  is  liow  taking  place 
:,  "!*  Johns.wiins."  ■' :--—- 


60  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

453.  Thii?  tense  is  often  cipployed  to  express  the  actions  of  perS)nslongsiuo« 
dead  ;  jis,  "  Seneca  reasons  suid  imuiilizes  well." 

4'.U.  The  present  tense,  j)rcceded  by  tlio  words  n-len,  Icfore,  after,  as  soon  at^ 
Ac  ,  is/sometnnes  u>ed  to  point  out  lli'o  ithitivc  time  of  a  future  actiou ;  as, 
"  Wlu-n  he  Jin  i\  e.<,  he  >Vill  Iteur  the  news.." 

43.J.  This  tense  is  elegantly  sipplicd  .to  qualities  and  things  which  arc  in  their 
V.atiire  unchaniiCi-hle  ;  as,  ••  Tiiitii  is  fternul;"  *•  Wiliuuu  boldly  asserted  that 
thcri;  was  no  Uod;"  properly,  '*  is  no  God." 

4=?5.  In  animated  (I.)  historical  narrations,  (2.)  this  tense  is  sometimes  used 
for  the"  iiiiptriecl;  as,  "lie  e^ittra  llie  teti  itory  of  t)\e  peaceable  inhabitants;  he 
fi"-]it5  and  conqaei's,  takes  an  irnuiense  booty,  which  ho  oivides  ainoug  his  sol- 
dievh,  and  returns  home  to  enjoy  an  cn)pty  iiiuuiph." 

487.  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  what  took  place  in  time 
pr;sr,  howevei-,  distant;  a.s,  "John  died." 

4S8.  The  -perfect  tense  cxpres?^es  v.  Iiat  hns  taken  place, 
and  conve\s  i\r\  ali-js.cn  lo  ihe  pre.-:cnt  time;  as,  *'l  have 
finished  my  icLtrr." 

' il)}  Yv'hen  anv  particular  period  of  past  time  is  specified  or  alluded  to,  we 
ii-^e  the  imperfect  ten&e;  as,  "John  vlroteyestei  day;"  but  when  no  particular 
"asltimc  isspcciiicd,  wo  use  the  perfect  tense;  a.><,  "I  have  read  Virgil  mauy 
times."  - 

4'jO.  The  T)orfect  tense  and  the  imperfect  tense  botli  denote  a  thing  that  is 
past- but  the  V'jrmer  denote.;  i>  in  such  a  manner  that  there  is  still  actually  re- 
rviin'iii"-  soriio  >xirt  of  the'titr.c  to  slide  away,  wherein  we  declare  the  thing  has 
been  done;  wLiereastlic  imperfect  denotes  the  thing  or  action  past,  in  such  a 
nvinu'^r  thai  nothing  remaius  of  that  time  in  whicli  ifc  was  done.  If  we  speak  of 
the  present  centurv,  wo  sav,  "l^hilosopheis /^a*?  7/ia'^'e  great  discoveries  in  the 
r,re«ent  ceMtii:"-"  Int.  if  wli  r.pe;;k  of  the  last  century,  we  say,  "  Philosoi)her3 
made  great'  discoveries  in  the  last  cer.tuiy."— "  .'ie  has  been  much  afflicted  this 
year  "  "  I  have  this  week  read  the  king's  proclamation."  "  I  have  heard  great 
uewfi  this  morning.'  In  these  in-itances,  Jh  has  b^eii,  I  have  read,  and  heard,  de- 
note tiiiu"-^  that  are  past;  bat  thev  occurred  in  this  yea;-,  in  this  week,  and  to- 
day ;  aiid^stiil  thure  reuKiius  a  part  of  this  year,  week,  and  day,  whereof  I  speak. 
4f)0_l.  In  general,  the  perfect  tense  may-be  applied  wherever  the  action  is 
conn-cted  with  the  present  time,  by  the  actuid  existence,  either  of  the  author  or 
of  the  work,  rliou<'h  it  may  have  been  performed  many  centuries  ago;  but  if 
ne'^h^r  the  artho"nor  the  work  now  remains,  it  cannot  be  used.  We  may  say, 
•'ri'ceVo/'^w.'v^V/i  orations;"  but  we  cannot  say,  "  Ci;:ero  has  ivritien  poems;" 
b^etuse  tho  orations  are  in  being,  bnt  the  poems  arc  lost.  Speaking  of  priests  m 
cc-rM-al  we  mi.y  >  a''-,  '•  They  hace,  in  ail  ages,  elcimul  great  ])owers;"  because  the 
''^ijer'al'order  of  the  p:-iesthond  stdl  exists  :  hut  if  we  speak  of  the  Druids,  as  any 
particular  order  of  |Hiests,  which  does  not  now  exist,  we  cannot  use  this  tense. 
We  cannot  sav,  ''  The  Dr. -id  priests  hace  dainud  great  powers;"  bnt  must  say, 
"  The  Druid  priests  claimed  great  powers;"  because  that  order  is  now  totally 
eitinct.  ' 

491.  The  pluperfect  tense  expressos  what  had  taken  place 
at  some  past  time  mentioned,  as,  "1  had  finished  my  letter 
before  my  father  returned." 

4D-3.  The  first  fuinre  tense  exprefises  what  will  take  place ; 
as,  "John  will  come." 

493.  The  sccandf^^t^re  expresses  what  will  have  taken 


(1.)  Lively.  (2.)  DescrpitioDB,  or  telling  what  has  been  done. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR,  Gl 

place,  at  or  before  somo  futmro  time  mpnriored  ;  as,  **  I  shall 
Lave  finished  my  bui^iiinss  before  the  steam-boat  starts." 

494.  Tense  is  the  distiiictioii  of  time,  and  :u!inlis  of  ^^;x 
variations,  namely — rihe  present,  the  imperfect,  the  Deifcct, 
the  pluperfect,  and  the  first  and  r^econd  fulurc  tenser. 


XL.  OF  PARTICIPLES. 

495.  In  the  phrase,  "  I  found  a  mnn  laborhij:  in  the  fielcl,"  the  vrord  lalcrin^ 
slows  what  tl)G  man  wus  doing,  and  therefore  resembles  svvcrb.  V.'hen  I  say, 
''The  laboring  man  siiouUi  not  be  wronged,"  labonvg  is  joined  t^  the  uoua  rna*i, 
to  describe  it,  nnd  therelurc  resembled  an  adjective. 

496.  The  word  laborinaf,  then,  purtakes  of  the  nr.fnre  of  two  difTerent  pn.rts 
cf  speed) ;  and  s.\nc(} pa.'iicijple  iijrui&cs paria/:ii}(?  ■/,  \\c  will  call  such  words  as 
labcrhnj,  participles. 

497.  All  participles  nre  derived  from  verbs  ;  thus,  from  ^adcr  comes  laboring  ; 
from  heat,  heating  ;  j'rjoice,  ?yjoici7ig,  kc. :  Lenccj 

498.  The  jjarliciple  is  a  v/ord  derived  from  a  verb,  and 
partakes  of  the  nature  of  a  verb  and  adjective. 

499.  When  I  saj',  "John  is  v.-riting,"  the  participle  icniwrr  shovrs  \i  hat  John 
is  now  doinoj,  but  has  not  liuishcd  ;  zuniing,  then,  ma^-  be  called  a  present  par- 
ticiple :  hence, 

500.  The  presei^t  participle  expres.^e.s  ^vhat  is  cov/  taking 
place,  but  not  finished. 

.500—1.  This  participle  always  ends  in  inrj  ;  as,  einnirg,  f.glUir.c;,  ict^epinrr, 
loving,  Ac.  There  are  many  v.ords  of  this  termination,  wiiich'are  not  p:irtici- 
pies  fas,  morning,  evening,  whi-.'h  are  nouns;  aiiwiercHting,  ■unsatl'^Jyiiig,  which 
arc  adjectives.  The  fact  that  these  Ciuinot  beiormtd  li-oiu  verbs  uili  fuinish  you 
with  a  certain  rule  for  distinguishing  the  participle  from  all  otlier  v.  ords  ot  'the 
same  termination  ;  as,  lor  instance,  iniinttrcfting,  WiiVuow.  is  not  a  participle, 
because  there  is  no  such  verb  as  unintuci,  froiii  which  to  ioim  it. 

,501.  "  The  letter  is  vrritten."  Here  the  participle  wriitcn  shoe's  that  the  act 
of  wilting  is  past  and  (iuished  ;  it  may  then  be  calltd  a  perfect  participle  :  hence, 

502.  The  perfect  participle  cxprerjses  what  is  past  and 
finished. 

502 — h  Thi'?  participle  mny  always  be  distinpiiiishcd  by  its  making  sense  with 
having  ;  thus,  hating  u'ritU.x,  kacing  sung,  Lc.  Here  ivriiien  and  sung  arc  perfect 
participles. 

503.  ",Tohn,  having  written  his  letter,  sealed  it."  Here  yon  donbllesr-  per- 
ceive that  the  act  of  wi-iting  took  place  before  that  of  seiding:  also,  that  the 
particle  is  composed  of  two  words,  haxivg  and  u-rii.te]i  ;  it  may  then  be  called  a 
compound particijyle,  and  because  it  denotes  also  an  action  pa.st  and  finished,  it 
may  very  properly  be  called  a  compound  pcj-fect  participle:  hence, 

501.  The  compound  perfect  p:ir!icip]c  expresses  what 
took  place  before  something  else  mentioned. 

604 — 1.  This  participle  i?  formed  by  placing  tho  present  participle  Jixwf'K/y  b»- 
fbra  the  parieet  participle  of  any  verb ;  as,  having  fowjhi,  Iwoimj  c.pker^d. 


62  ENGLISH  GEAMxMAPt. 

XLI.  FORMATION  OF  THE  PASSIVE  VERB.      - 

,",0-3.  Struc^i  is  a  perfect  participle,  from  tUc  verb  sinl-e,  aud  this  you  know, 
because  it  makes  sense  joined  with  having  ;  ns,  having  drvcJc. 

r.06.  Is,  you  doubtless  recollect,  is'a  variation  of  the  verb  to  le ;  rs,  "  I  am, 
vQu  are,  be  is ;"  uo\^',  by  joining  is  with  drud-,  we  can  form  the  passive  verb  w 
^irrfcrc;  "  John  struck  Joseph,"  is  active;  but,  "Joseph  is  struck  by  John,"  is 
passive.'  .  -         . ..  . 

507.  In  these  two  examples,  you  perceive  that  the  sense  of  each  is  the  ^a-iie  : 
hence,  by  means  of  the  passive  vei*b,  W£  are  enabled  to  express,  in  a  difierent 
form,  the  precise  meaning  of  the  active,  Avhich,  you  will  oftentimes  find,  contri- 
butes not  a  little  to  the  variety  and  harmony  of  the  language. 

50S.  By  examining  the  conjiigation  of  the  verb  to  be,  you  will  discover  that 
it  has,  in  all,  ten  variations :  vik  am,  art,  is,  are,  was,  tvast,  were,  Icen,  be,  and  bi- 
ina.  Every  |>Rssivc  verb  must  bo  composed  of  one  of  these  ten  variations,  and 
the  perfect  participle  of  any  active  transitive  verb.  Thus,  taking  ijcas,  and  join- 
ing it  with  the  perfect  participle  of  the  verb  beat,  namely,  beaten,  we  form  tUo 
passive  verb  ■w;^^  beaten ,  Xo  \\\Aq\x  prefixing  an  object,  or  nominative  case,  we 
have  the  phrase,  "  William  was  beaten." 

509.  It  is  a  fact  worthy  to  be  remembered,  that  the  passive  verb  always  re- 
tains the  same  mood,  tense,  number^  and  person,  that  the  verb  to  be  has,  before 
it  IS  incorporated  with  the  participle;  thus.  "lie  has  been,"  is  the  indicative 
perfect,  third  person  singular;  then,  "He  has  been  rejected,"  is  likewise  the 
indicative  perfect,  tISird  person  singular,  passive.  It  cannot,  therefore,  be  difii- 
cult  to  tell  tiie  mood,  tense,  number,'  and  person,  of  any  passive  verb,  if  you 
are  fa;niliar  with  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  to  be. 

From  the  foregoing  particulars,  vre  derive  the  following  general  rule  : 

510.  All  passive  verbs  are  formed  by  adding-  the  perfect 
"participle     of   any    active-traiisitive    verb    to   the    neuter     ^ 

verb  io  be,  , 

XLIT.  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERB. 

511.  Auiliary  verbs  are  those  by  the  help  of  which  the 
principal  verbs  are  conjugated. 

512.  The  auxiliary  verbs  arc  may,  can,  must,  might,  could, 
would,  i^hoiild,  and  .skaU.  The  following  are  sometimes 
auxiiiaries,  and  sometimes  principal  verbs :  do,  be,  have  and 
7.vilL 

;j13.  Vriien,  in  tV.e  formation  of  any  tense,  we  use  an  auxiliary  verb,  that 
tens3  is  called  a  compound  one ;  and  the  tense  formed  by  the  principal  verb 
alone  is  called  a  simple  tense. 

0 

XLIII.  SIGNS  OF  THE  MOODS. 

514.  The  indictative  mood  may  be  known  by  the  sense, 
or  by  its  having  no  si.'^n  except  in  asking  a  question  ;  as, 
f' Who  comes  here  ?" 

515.  The  potei^tia,!  ^^opdhas  fqr,  its  sLi^^|3;j[}^^  '^yx-Uiaric^ 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR;  G3 

516.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  usually  for'  its  signs  the 
conjunctions  if,  though,  unless,  except,  icheih'er,  and  lest;  as, 
*' Unless  he  repent,"  &c. 

517.  The  infinitive  mood  has  usually  for  its  sign  the  word 
to;  as,  to  sing. 

518.  The  imperative  may  be  distinguished  by  its  ahvays 
being  in  the  second  person,  and  by  its  agreement  \viih 
thou,  or  ye,  or  you  ;  as,  "  Depart  thou,"  dec. 


XLIV.  SIGNS  OF  THE  TENSES  OP  THE  INDICATIVE. 

519.  The  present  tense  has  for  its  sign  the  first  form  of 
the  verb ;  as,  iceen,  remain,  &c. ;  excepting  the  occasional 
use  of  do ;  as,  ''  I  do  learn." 

520.  The  imperfect  tense  has  no  auxilary  for  a  sL^n,  ex- 
cept did,  Vv'hich  is  sometimes  used.  If,  hovvever,  the  verb 
is  not  in  the  present  tense,  and  has  no  auxilary,  it  follows 
that  it  is  in  the  imperfect ;  as,  ''  I  fought." 

521.  The  perfect  tense  has  for  its  sign  the  Vv^ord  have  ; 
as,  have  lov'ed. 

692.  The  pluperfect  has  for  its  sign^i^tZ;  as,  had  loved. 

523.  The  first  future  has  for  its  sign  shall  or  icill ;  as, 
shall  or  will  love. 

524.  The  second  future  has  for  its  sign  shall  have  or  idll 
have  ;  as,  shall  have  loved,  gr  will  havL\loved. 

525.  The  indicative  mood  has  six  tenses. 

526.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  six  tenses. 
627.  The  potential  mood  has  four  ttDilscs. 

528.  The  infinitive  mood*  has  two  tenses. 

529.  The  imperative  mood  has  one  tense. 


XLV.   CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 

530.  When  I  ask  you  to  raise  your  voice,  in  reading,  you  readily: nndersf and 
^hatl  mean  by  toice ;  but  in  ejrammar,  its  application  is  somewhat  peculiar. 
Grammatically  considered,  it  refers  to  the  active  and  passive  nature  of  verbs. 

531.  The  CONJUGATION  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  combina- 
tion and  arrangement  of  its  several  numbers,  persons, 
moods,  and  tenses. 


CA 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAPw, 


532.  The  coxjl'gation  of  nn  active  verb  is  styled  4he 
ACTIVE  VOICE,  and  that  of  a  pas:<ive  verb  the  passut:  voice. 

533.  Verbs  are  called  regular,  when  they  fovm  their  im- 
periect  tense  of  the  indicative  mcx;d,  and  their  perfect  par- 
ticiple, by  the  addition  of  ed  to  the  verb  in  the  present 
tensc^  or  d  only  when  the  verb  ends  in  e ;  a?, 

Pres.   Tense.         Imp.   Tense.         Per/,  Participle. 
1  favor.  I  favcred.  Favored. 

I  ]ove.  I  loved.  Loved. 

534.  "When  a  verb  does  not  form  its  imperfect  tense  and 
perfect  participle  in  this  manner,  it  is  called  an  irregular 
vLRu;  as, 

Pres.   Tense.         Imp.  Tense.         Per  J.  Participle. 
I  am.  I  was.  Been. 

535.  The  regular  verb  love,  and  the  irregular  verb  to  6j, 
are    conjugated  as  follov/s  : — 

CONJUa-ATIOH. 
TO  LOVE    AND    TO  BE. 


ACTIVE     AN  D 


ACTIVn     TOICE- 

S'tn<jular. 

I  love. 

You  love. 

He  loves. 

Plarai. 
1  Pers.  We  love. 
?j  pars.  You  iove. 
8  Pcfi.  They  love. 


1  P^rs. 

2  P^rs. 
'6  P^.  s. 


Singuiar. 

1.  I  loved. 

2.  Yo;i  !o'v-ed. 

3.  He  loved. 

Plural- 


V7e  loved, 
''ou  loved. 


3,  Tbey  loved. 

1.  1  have  loved. 

2.  You  have  loved. 
Z:  Ke  bas  Tovcd. 


PASSIVE     VOICE 
#XDICATIYE  MOOD. 

rUESEXT    TEXSE. 
PASSIVE    VOICE. 

S'-yignlar. 

1  Pcrs.  I  am  loved. 

2  Po/'s.  You  are  loved. 

3  Pe.  $.  He  is  loved. 

Plural. 

1  Pirs.  V/e  are  loved- 

2  pK.r3.  You  are  loved. 

3  Pf^rs.  Tuey  are  loved. 

lilPERFiCr    TENSE. 

Slagvilar. 

1.  I  was  loved. 

2.  You  were  loved. 

3.  He  v/is  loved. 

PLiiral 

1.  We  wore  loved. 

2.  You  were  lovsd. 
5.  They  wero  loved. 

PERFECT    TE.VSE. 

Singular. 

1.  I  have  been  loved. 

2.  You  have  been  loved. 
".  He  haa  been  loved. 


CONTRASTED 


NECTEa. 

lingular. 

1  Pt-1's.  I  am. 

2  Pt'i's.  You  are. 

3  Pen.  He  is. 

Pural. 

1  Pcrs.  We  are. 
S  Prrs.  You  are. 

2  Pers.  They  are. 

1.  I  was. 

2.  You  were. 
S.  He  was. 

PluraL 

1.  We  were. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  Tbey  were. 

Singidar. 

1.  I  have  been. 

2.  You  have  been. 
8.  He  has  bpen 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


65 


Plural. 

Plural. 

Plural. 

Wc  have  loved. 
You  have  loved. 
They  have  loved. 

1. 
2. 

We  have  been  loved. 
You  have  been  loved. 
They  have  been  loved. 

PLCPERFECr   TEN-SB. 

I. 
2. 
3. 

We  have  been. 
You  have  been. 
They  have  been. 

Sincrular. 

Singular. 

Singular. 

I  had  loved. 
You  had  loved. 
He  had  loved. 

1. 

I  had  been  loved. 
You  had  been  luved. 
He  had  been  loved. 

1. 
2. 

a. 

I  had  been. 
You  had  been. 
He  had  been. 

Plural. 

Plural. 

Plural. 

We  had  loved. 
You  had  loved. 
They  had  loved. 

1. 
3. 

We  had  been  loved. 
You  hud  been  loved. 
They  had  been  loved. 

FIRST   FUTURE   TEXSE. 

1. 

2. 
3.' 

We  had  bsen. 
You  had  been. 
They  had  been. 

Singular. 
I  shall  or  will  love. 
You  shall  or  will  love. 

1. 
2. 

Singular. 
I  shall  or  will  be  loved. 
You    shall    or  will   be 

1. 

2. 

Singular. 
I  shall  or  will  be. 
You  shall  or  will  be. 

He  shall  or  vrill  love. 

3. 

loved. 

He  shall  or  will  be  lov- 
ed. 

Plural. 

We    i5hall    or    will  be 
loved. 

You   sliall  or    will  be 
loved. 

Thov  shall  cr  will  be 

3. 

He  shall  or  will  be 

Phrral. 
We  shall  or  will  love. 

You  shall  or  will  love. 

1. 
2. 

1. 
2. 

Plural. 
We  shall  or  will  be. 

You  shall  or  will  be. 

They  shall  or  will  love. 

?.. 

8. 

They  shall  cr  will  be. 

Singular. 

1.  i  shall  have  loved. 

2.  You  will  have  loved, 

3.  He  will  have  bved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  shall  have  loved. 

2.  You  will  have  loved. 

3.  They  will  have  loved. 


Singular. 
i.  I  naay  or  can  love. 

2.  You  may  or  can  love. 

3.  He  may  or  can  love. 

Plural. 

1.  We  may  or  can  love. 

2.  You  may  or  can  love. 

3.  They  C'ay  or  can  love. 


loved. 

SECOXD  FUTURE   TEXSE. 

Singular. 

1.  I  .shall  have  been  loved.  1. 

2.  You   shall  have  ,  been  2. 

loved. 

3.  He    will     have     been  3. 

loved. 
Plural. 

1.  We    shall    have    been  1. 

loved. 

2.  You    will    have     been  2. 

loved. 
[3.  They    will    have   been  S. 
loyed. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT    TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  I  raay  or  can  be  loved.  1. 

2.  You  may  or  can  be  lov-  2. 

■  ed. 

3.  He  may  or  cau  be  loved.  3. 

Plural. 

1.  Wo  may  or  can  be  lov-  1. 

cd. 

2.  You    may    cr    can   bo  2. 

loved. 

3.  They  may    or  can  be  3. 

loved. 


Singular. 
I  shall  have  been. 
You  will  have  been. 

He  will  have  been. 

Plural. 
We  shall  have  been. 

You  will  have  been. 

They  will  have  been. 


Singular. 
1  may  or  can  be. 
You  va^y  or  can  be. 

He  may  or  can  be. 

Piural. 
We  may  or  can  be. 

1  ou  may  or  cau  be. 

They  may  or  can  be. 


GG 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


iShigular. 

1.  I  might,  could,  would,  1. 

01-  should  love. 

2.  You  mi;^ht,  could, would,  2. 

or  should  love. 

n.  He  misht,  could,  would,  3. 
or  should  love. 

Plural. 
1.  AVe  might,  could,  would,  1. 

or  should  love. 
L'.   You  n>ight,,  could, would,  2. 

or  should  love. 


IMPERFECT    TEXSE. 

^Singular.      ■, 
I  might,  could,  would,  1. 

or  should  be  loved. 
You       might,      could,  2. 

would,  Kjr  should  be 

loved. 
He  might,  could,would,  3. 

or  should  be  loved. 


S.  Thov       might, 
would,      or 
■'  ■-  iove. 


could,  S. 
should 


Singular. 

1.  I  may  or  can  have  lov-  1. 

ed. 

2.  You   may  or  cau  have  2. 

loved. 
S.  lie    may    or    can   have  3. 

loved. 
Plural. 
1.  We   may  or    can    have  1. 

loveS. 
2    You  may  or    can   have  2, 

loved. 
i.  They  may  or  cau  have  8. 

loved. 


ShignJar. 

1.  I  might,  could,  would,  or  1. 

should  have  loved. 

2.  Toa  might,  could,would,  2. 

0/' should  have  loved. 

g.  He  might,  could,  would,  3. 
or  should  have  loved. 


Plural. 

1.  Wemight,  could,  would,  1. 

or  should  have  loved. 

2.  You  might,  could,would,  2. 

or  should  have  loved. 

S.  They  raight,could,would  3, 
or  should  have  loved. 


Plural. 
We  might,  could, would,  1 . 

or  should  be  loved. 
You      might,      could,  2. 

would,  or  should  be 

loved. 

They      might,     could,  3. 
would,  or  should  be 
loved. 

PERFECT    TENSE. 

S'iigiilar. 
I  may  or  can  have  been  1. 

loved. 
You  may  or  can  have  2. 

been  loved. 
He   may  ov  can    have  3. 

been  loved. 
Plural. 
We  may  or  can  have  1. 

been  loved. 
You  may  or  can  have  2. 

beeij  loved. 
They  may  or  can  have  S. 

been  loved. 

rLC PERFECT   TEXSE. 

Singular. 
I  might,  could,  M'ould,  1, 

or  should  have  been 

loved. 
You  might,could, would  2. 

or  should  have  been 

loved. 
He  might,  eould,would,  3. 

or  should  have  been 

lovel. 

Plural. 
.  We  might, could, wotild,  1, 

or  should  have  been 

loved. 
Y^ou  might, could,would  2. 

or  should  have  been 

loved. 
,  They,    might,     could,  3. 

w"ouId,or  should  have 

been  loved. 


Singular. 
I  might,  could,  wculdh* 

or  should  be. 
You       might,       could  ^ 

would,  or  should  be. 

He  might,  couldjwould? 
or  should  be. 

Plu:-aL 
We  might,could,would7 

or  should  be. 
You       might,      could, 

would,  or  should  be. 

They     might,      could, 
would,  or  should  be. 


Singular. 
I    may     or    can    have 

been. 
You  may  or  can  have 

been. 
He    may  or  can  have 

been. 
Plural. 
We   may   or  can  havtt 

been. 
You  may  or  can  have 

been. 

They  may  or  can  have 
been. 


Singvlar. 

I  might, could, would,  or 

should  have  been. 

You  might, could,woul(I 
or  should  have  been. 


He  might,  could, would, 
or  should  have  been. 


Plvral. 
We  might, could, would' 
or  should  have  been- 

You  might,could,would 
or  should  have  been. 

They  might,  could, 
would,(?/-should  have 
bceu. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR, 


67 


Singii!(ir 

1.  If  I  love. 

2.  If  jon  lovp. 
a.  If  he  loves. 

Plural. 

1 .  If  wo  love. 

2.  If  you  love. 

0.  If  tliey  love. 

iSiigidar. 

1.  If  I  love! 

t>.  If  you  love. 
8.  If  be  love. 

Plnml. 
1.  If  we  love. 
12.  If  vou  love. 
■i.  If  thev  love. 


Singular. 
1.  If  I  loved. 
"J.  If  you  loved, 
a.  If  he  loved.  * 

Plural. 
1.  If  we  loved. 
ii.  If  you  loved. 
;j.  If  they  loved. 

S'ngiilar. 
1.  If  I  loved. 
'J.  If  you  loved. 
3.  If  he  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  loved. 

2.  If  vou  loved. 
S.  If  they  loved. 

The  rcmai 

/lingular. 
1.  If  I  have  ioved. 
L'.  If  you  have  loved. 

3.  If  he  has  loved. 

Plural. 
1.  If  we  have  loved. 
'J.  If  you  liave  loved, 
y.  If  they  have  loved. 

Singular. 
1.  If  I  had  ICVcd. 
'J.  If  you  had  loved, 
o.  If  he  had  loved. 


1. 


If  I  am. 

2.  If  vou  are. 

3.  If  he  is. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  are. 

2.  If  you  are. 

3.  If  they  are. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  be. 

2.  If  vou  be. 

0.  If  he  be. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  be. 

2.  If  vou  be. 

3.  If  they  be. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT    TEXSE. 

Common  Forin. 
Singular. 

1.  If  I  am  loved. 
•J.'  If  you  are  I  ved. 
3.  If  he  is  loved. 

Plural. 
\.  If  we  are  loved. 

2.  If  y(m  are  loved. 

3.  If  they  are  loved. 
Suljjundice  Fonn. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  be  loved. 

2.  If  you  bo  loved. 
S.  If  ho  be  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  be  loved. 

2.  If  you  be  loved. 

3.  If  they  be  loved. 

IMPERFECT    TEXSB. 

Commo7i  Form. 
Singular. 

1.  If  I  was  loved. 

2.  If  you  were  loved. 

3.  If  he  was  loved. 

riu,'al. 

1.  If  we  were  loved. 

2.  If  you  were  loved. 

3.  If  they  were  loved. 
Suhjiinctive  Form. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  were  loved. 

2.  If  you  were  loved. 

3.  If  h«  ivero  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  were   loved. 

2.  If  you  were  loved. 

3.  If  they  were  loved. 
g  tenses  arc  oil  of  Die   Common  Form. 

I'KRFECT     TKXSR. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  have  been  loved. 

2.  If  you  have  been  loved. 

3.  If  he  has  been  loved. 

Plural. 

1 .  If  we  have  been  loved. 

2.  If  you  have  been  loved. 
I'.  Ifthey  have  been  loved.  3.  If  they  have  been. 

Pr.UPKRFEGT   TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  had  been  loved. 

2.  If  you  had  been  loved. 

3.  If  he  had  been  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  was. 

2.  If  you  were. 
If  he  was. 

Plural. 
If  we  wore. 
If  you  were. 
If  thev  were. 


3. 


Singular 

1.  If  I  were. 

2.  If  you  were. 

3.  If  he  were. 

Fhn-al. 

1.  If  we  were. 

2.  If  you  were. 

3.  If  thev  were. 


Singul'ir. 

1.  If  I  liave  been. 

2.  If  you  have  been. 

3.  If  he  has  been. 

Plural. 
1.  If  we  have  been. 
If  you  have  been. 


Singular.- 

1.  If  I  had  been. 

2.  If  you  had  been. 

3.  If  he  had  been. 


t}8  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

Plural.  PInral.  Plural, 

1.  If  we  had  loved.  1.  If  we  had  been  loved.  1.  If  we  had  been. 

2.  If  Tou  had  loved.  2.  If  you  had  been  loved.  2.  If  you  had  been. 

3.  If  "they  hud  loved.  3.  If  ihey  had  boeu  loved.  '6.  If  ihey  had  been. 

FIKST   FCTCUE   TEXSE. - 

Singular.  lingular.  Singular. 

1.  If  I  shall  or  will  love.    1.  If  I   shall    or   will  be  1.  If  I  shall  or  will  be. 

loved. 

2.  If  yoa  shall  or  will  love.   2.  If  you  shall  or  will  be  2.  If  you  shall  or  will  be- 

loved. 

3.  If  he  shall  or  will  love.    3.  If  he   shall  or  will  be  3.  If  he  shall  or  will  be. 

lo.ved. 
Plurnl.  P!ur(iL  _  Plural. 

1.  If  we  shall  or  will  love.  1.  If  we  shall  or  will  "be  1.  If  wo  shall  or  will  be. 

loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will  love.  2.  If  he  shall  or  will  be    2.  If  you  shall  or  will  be. 

loved. 
8.  If  thej  shall  or  will  love.  3.  If  tlioy  shall  cr  will  be  3.  If  they  shall  or  will  be. 

loved. 

SECOXD   FUTURE   TEXSE. 

Singular.  Sin<rii!>jr.  Sing^dar. 

1.  If  I  shall  have  loved.     1.  If  I    shall    have  been  1.  If  I  shall  have  been. 

loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  have  loved.    2.  If  you  shall  have  been  2.  If  you  shall  have  been. 

lo^ed. 
8.  If  he  shall  have  loved.      3.  If  he    shall  have  been  3.  If  he  shall  have  been, 

loved.  ^ 

Plura!.  Plural,  Plural 

1.  If  we  shall  have  loved.    1.  If  we  shall  have  been  ].  If  we  shall  have  been. 

loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  have  loved,    2.  If  you  shall  have  been  2.  If  you  shall  hare  beeii. 

loved. 

8.  If  thej  shall  have  loved.  3.  If  they  shall  have  been  3.  If  they  shall  have  been. 

loved. 

DIPERATIYE  MOOD. 

PRESENT    TKNSS. 

Singular.  Singidar.  Singular. 

2.  Love    you>   cr  do    you  2.  Be  you    loved,    or  do  2.  Be  you,  or  do  you  be. 
love.          .•           "                you  be  loved, 

Plural.  Plural .  Plural. 

9.  Love   you,    or  do   you  2.  Be   jou    loved,    or  do  2.  Be     you,    or    do    you 

love.  you  be  loved.  be. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 
Fres.  To  love.  P'W.  To  be  loved.  Fres.  To  be. 

Per/.  To  have  loved.  Pti''/-  '^^  have  been  loved.  Per/.  To  have  been. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  Lovinj^.  Fres.  Beinor  loved.  Fres.  Being. 

Per/.  Loved:  Ferf.  Loved.  Fe?-/.  Been. 

Compovnd  Ferf.  Componnd  Fcrf.  Compound  Ferf. 

Having  loved.   '  Having  been  loved.  Having  been. 

53?).  For  the  benefit  of  those  who  wish  to  retain  the  pronoun  tli!:u,  in  the  con- 
jugation of  verbs,  the  following  synopsis  i.s  given.  The  pupil  can  take  it  sepa- 
rately, or  be  taught  it  in  counection  with  the  other  persons  of  the  verb,  by  sub- 
gtituting  thov.  for  ynUy  in  the  foregoing  conjugation. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


69 


J^es.  Thou   lovest. 
Imp.  Thou  lovest. 
Perf.  Thou  hast  loved. 
^lup.  Thou  hadst  loved. 

1  Fut.  Tbou  shalt  or  wilt 

love. 

2  Fut.  Thou     wilt      hare 

loved. 

'  537. 
Pres.  Thou  niajst  or  canst 

love. 
/OTp.  Thou  mi.^htst.oouldst, 

wouldst,  cr  shouldst 

love. 
Perf.   Thou  mnyst  cr  canst 

lijive  loved. 
P/Uj3.    Thou  mightst, 

oouldst,  wouldst,   or 

shouldst  have  loved. 


588. 
Prcs.   If  thou   lovest. 
Imp.  If  thou  lovedst, 

539. 
P-es.   If  thou   love. 
Imp.   If  thou  loved. 

540. 
Perf.  If  thou   hast  loved 
Pli)p    " 


Si/nopein  %vlih  Tuou. 
INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
Thou  art  loved. 
Thou  wast  loved. 
Thou  hast  been  loved. 
Thou  hudst  been  loved. 
Thou    Shalt    or    wilt    be 

loved. 
Thou     wilt     have     been 

loved. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

Thou   mayst  cr  canst  be 

loved. 
Thou     mishtst,     couldst, 

wouldst,  or  shouldst 

be  loved. 
Thou  mayst  (r  canst  have 

been  loved. 
Thou     mightst,     couldst, 

wouldst  or  shouldst 

have  been  loved. 


Thou  art. 
Tliou   wast. 
Thou  hast  been. 
Thou  hadst  been. 
Thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Thou  wilt  have  been. 


Tbou     mavst     or    canst 

be.     ' 
Thou    mightst,     could.st, 

wouldst,  cr  shouldst 

be. 
Thou  mayst  cr  canst  have 

been. 
Thou     mightst,    couldst, 

wouldst,  or  shouldsi 

have  been. 


If  thou  hadst  loved. 
Fat.    It    thou     shalt   or. 
wilt  love, 


1 

2  Fat.   If  thou  shalt  have  If  thou   shalt  have   been 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Comvxon  Form. 
If  thou  art  loved. 
If  thou  wast  loved. 

Subjunctive  Form. 
If  thou  be   loved. 
If  thou   wert  loved. 

Ct.mmon  Form, 
If  thou  hast  been  loved. 
If  thou  hadst  been  loved. 
If  thou   shalt  or   wilt  be  If 

loved. 


If  thou   art. 
If  thou   wast. 


If  thou  bo. 
If  thou  wert. 


If  thou   hast  beer. 
If  ihou   hadst  been, 

thou      shalt     or     wilt 

be. 
thou  shalt  have  been. 


loved. 


loved. 
Interrogathe   Form. 
INDICATIVE  PRESENT. 

niar. 


lingular. 

1,  Am-  I? 

2.  Are  you? 
S.  Is   he? 

Plural. 

1.  Are  we? 

2.  Are  you  ? 

3.  Are  they  ? 


.'41. 

Singular.         *  Si    , 

1.  Do  I  love?       '  1.  Am   I   loved? 

2.  Do  you  love?  2.  Are  you   loved? 
J.  Does  be  love?  S.  Is  he   loved? 

Plural  Plural. 

1.  Do  we  love?  ].  Are  we   loved? 

S.  Do  you  love?  2.  Are  you  loved? 

3.  Do  they  love?  3.  Are  they  loved? 
.542.     You  will  find,  on  examination  of  the  foregoing  conjugation,   that   tha 

tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are  in  every  respect  similar  to  the  corresponding  onea 
of  the  indicative,'  except  the  following,  namely,  the  present  and  in;j)errect  of  the 
verb  to  hf ;  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  passive  ;  the  present  and  the  second 
future  active.  The  last,  however,  corresponds  in  termination,  but  not  in  form.; 
tio:i.  Among  the  exceptions  should  be  reckoned  the  use  of  the  conjunction  -//. 
Th^re  are  instances,  howfever,  of  the  subjunctive  form,  when  no  conjunction  "is 
expressed,  but  in  all  such  cases  it  is  ])l:iinly  understood ;  as,  "  Were  I  to  go,  ho 
would  not  follow  ;"  "  Had  he  known  me.  he  would  have  treated  me  differently  ;" 
that  is,  "  If  I  were  to  go,"  and,  "  If  he  had  known."  Examples  of  this  descrip- 
tion  are  conjugated  ah  follows; 


70  ENGLISH  GRAMMAIl. 


54J. 


SLBJUXCTIVE  FORM. 

IMPEUKECi-     TtXSK. 

Siiigiday. 

Plural. 

1.  Were  T, 
'_'.*  \Vere  you. 
Z,  Were  lie. 

i. 
rLCrEBFECT   TENSE. 

Were   we. 
V\'ere  you. 
Vv'cre  they. 

Siiipdar. 

Plural. 

1.  Had  I  loved. 

2.  Had   you   loved. 

3.  Had   he   loved.  ' 

1. 
2. 

3. 

Had  we  loved. 
Had  you   loved. 
Had   they  loved 

The  second  person  singular  of  all  verbs*  formerly  fl.)  ended  in  st,  as, 
last,"  "  Thoii  wast,"  <fec.     This  form  is  still  retained  by  that  respectable 


?>44. 
"Thouhf 
class  of  i>crsons  denominated  (2.)  Friends,  and  in  the  Sacred  (y.)  Scriptures.  (8.) 

545.  Eik,  for  the  termination  of  the  third  person  singular,  obtained  (4.)  very 
generally  till  within  a  recent  (-3.)  period,  especially  on  grave  (6.)  and  didactic  (7.) 
subjects  ;  as,  "  He  that  Jtath  ears  to  hear,  let  him  hear;"  "Simple  multiplication 
teacketli  to  i-epeat,"  <tc.  But  the  custom  of  the  present  day  is  decidedly  (8.) 
against  the  usage.  (li.) 

r)46.  The  Scriptures  abound  (10.)  with  instances  of  the  use  of  the  pronoun 
ye  for  y^.u  ;  as,  "  Yo  are  the  salt  of  the  earth  ;"  but  it  is  scarcely  to  be  met  with 
in  any  standard  works  ot  modern  date. 

54^7.     The  following  conjugation  accords  with  the  ancient  usage  of  the  verb. 
INDICATIVE  PRESENT. 


1. 

2. 
S. 

Singular. 
I  love. 
Thou  lovest. 
He  loveth  or  loves. 

1. 

3. 

Singular. 
I   am   loved. 
Thou    art   loved. 
He  is  loved. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

Singular. 
I   am. 
Thou   art. 
He  is. 

Plural. 

Plural. 

Plural. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

We  love. 

Ye  or  yoii  love. 

They   iovc. 

1. 
2. 
3,' 

V\'o   are  loved. 

Ye  or  you  are  loved. 

They  are  loved. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

"We  are. 

Ye  cr  you  are. 

They  are. 

.543.  '^W  For  further  illustration  of  these  obsolete  conjugations,  the  learner 
is  referred  to  those  treatises  on  grammar  in  our  schools,  which  pro/ess  to  furnisli 
him  with  a  sure  and  inlaliibii-  guide  to  the  true  and  proper  use  of  the  English 
language. 

RULE    VI. 

The  nominative  case  governs  the  verb  in  number  and  'person. 

RULE!  Vn. 
A  verb  must  agree  with  its  nomlnaiiue   case   in  number  and 

person. 

RUIiE  Tin. 

Active-transitive  verbs  govern  the  objective  case. 
EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
*•  William  was  admired  for  his  prudence.^^ 
549.   William  is  a  propernoun,  of  the  tfurd   persox,  sin- 


*  Excepting  art 

(1.)  Some  time  ago.  (2.)  Called.  CS.)  The  Biblo.  (4.)  Prevailed.  (5.)Lat(j 
(6.)  Serious.  (7.)  Abounding  in  precepts  or  instructive.  (?.)  Positirely. 
(v.)  U&e.     (10.)  Have  mauy. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAH.  It 

rJULAR  KUMBER,  MASCULINE  GENDER,  and  ill  th(^.  >OMINATIVE  CASE 

to  was  admired,  agreeably  to  IltfLE  YI. 

JVas  admired  is  a  regular  passive  verb,  from  the  verb  to 
admire — ''Prcs.  admire  ;  Imp.  admired  ;  Fcrf.  /7«r^  admired. 
1.  I  was  admired  ;  2.  You  were  admired  :  3.  He  or  William 
was  admired" — made  in  the  indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense, 
THIRD  PERSON,  SINGULAR  NUMBER,  and  agrecs  with  William, 
according  to  IIule  VU. 

For  is  a  preposition. 

His  is  a  personal  pronoun,  of  the  third  person,  singular 
number,  masculine  gendhr,  and  agrees  with  TFiV/m/;?,  accord- 
ing to  lluLE  Y. — "  No?n.  he  ;  Foss  liis  " — made  in  the  posses- 
sive case,  and  governed  b}'  'prudence,  by  Rule  I. 

Prudence  is  a  common  NouN|n)r  the  third  person,  singular 

NUMBER,  neuter  GENDER,  OBJECTIVE  CASE,  aiui  gOVCmed  bv  for. 

Rule  X.  * 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSTXG  COXTIXUED. 

"John    -was    applauded    for    Lis    clo-  "  The  girl  was  ridiculed  bv  her  conipau- 

quence."  ions." 

"  The  king  was  crowned  at  "Wostuiinster  "  Susan  was  respected  for  her  virtuous 

Abbey."  conduct." 

"  Thomas  has  been  esteemed."  "  James  will  be  rewarded  by  his  in- 
"  The  business  will  be  rej.mlated."  structor." 


^' Wc  may  be  esteemed."  "Justice  may  have  been  staved." 

^-  He  might  have  been  promoted."  "  The  task  must  be  performed." 

'  William  would  have  been  dethroned."      "  We  should  not  (1.)  be  easily  O.)  dis- 
heartened iu  u  good  cause." 

'-'If  he  he  kanicdr 

550.  If  is  a  COPULATIVE  conjunction. 

Be  learned  is  a  regular  passive  verb,  from  the  verb  to  learn 
— "  Prcs.  learn  ;  Imper.  learned  ;  Perf.  part.  learned.  1.  If 
1  be  learned  ;  2.  If  you  be  learned  ;  3.  Jf  he  be  learned  " — 
made  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  subjunctive  roRjvr,  present 
tense,  third  PER30N,  LINGULAR  NUMBER,  and  agrccs  with  Ae, 
according  to  Rule  Yll. 

EXERCISES  IN  SrXTAX  CONTINUED. 

"  If  John  be  rewarded."  "  Although  you  will  be  disappointed." 

*'  If  I  am  noticed."  "It  the  nuiu"  had  been  elected." 

"  Unless  he  be  punished."  '•  Except  he  repent." 

"Altliougji  they  are  respected."  "Susan  assisted  the  littl^ir]." 

"  Columbus  discovered  America."  "  The  little  girl  was  assisted  by  Susan,'"' 

"  America  was  discovered  by  Columbus."  "  Pain  follows  pleasure." 

"  John  wounded  his  brother  "  "  Pleasure  is  followed  by  pain." 
'■  John's  brother  W8S  wounded  bv  him." 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAfe. 


"An  obedient  aoiiisdeaervetUj  respected 

by  bis  friends." 
"  An  idle  boy  will  be  punished." 
•'  VS'^ithout  knowledge,  a  man  is  common- 
ly (1.)  despised." 

3. 

"  The  boy  who  visited  me  in  September, 
died  in  the  cicy  of  Cti:iriestuj." 

"  The  man  whom  I  found  perished  in  a 
Btona  of  snow." 


Unless  Croat  labor  had  been  bcs.lowc<i 
on  William,  he  wonld  have  disap- 
pointed the  expectations  of  his 
parents." 

He  will  not  (1.)  mind  without  corpo- 
ral punishment." 


They  that  seek  knowledge  will  find 
it." 

That  lion  which  was  exhibited  in  this 
town  has  been  killed  by  his  keep- 
er." 


Ifound(2.jJohnand'VVil!iam(3.unthc 
garden  with  their  father  and  moth- 
er. (3.,) 


I  have  assisted  him  and  his  sister  in 
many  difBcuiiies,  to  no  (4.)  pur- 
pose." 


XLVI.   OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

551.  Irregular  verbs  are  those  which  do  not  form  their 
imperfect  tense  and  perfect  participle  by  adding  to  the  pres- 
ent tense  ed,  or  d  only  when  the  verb  ends  in  e  ;  as, 

Pres.  tense.         Iraperf.  tense.         Perf.  Particivh. 
Go,  Went,  Gone, 


Begin, 

Began, 

Begun. 

LIST 

OF  lERIIGUIsAR  VERBS. 

Those  marked  r  admit  likewise  a 

regular  form. 

Pnmrt. 

tmyzrfect.  Per.  or  Pa-ss.  Part. 

Peserot. 

Imperfect.     Per.  or  Pass.  Part. 

Abide, 

abod3. 

abode. 

Hang, 

hung,  r.         hung.  r. 

Am, 

was. 

been. 

Hear, 

heard,             heard. 

Arise, 

arose. 

arisen. 

Hew, 

hi'v/ed,            hewn.  r. 

Awake, 

awoke,  r. 

awaked. 

Hide, 

hid,                 hidden,  hid. 

Bear,  to  ) 
Bear,foco; 

Hit, 

bit,                 bit. 

bare. 

born. 

Hold, 

held,               held. 

Hurt, 

hurt,               hurt. 

r^jbore. 

Viorne. 

Keep, 

kept,               kept. 

Beat, 

beat. 

beaten,  beat. 

Knit,     J 

knit,  r.            knit.  r. 

Begin, 
BcJnd, 

began. 

begun. 

Know, 

knew,              known. 

bent. 

bent. 

Lade, 

lade*?-              laden. 

Bereave, 

bereft,  r. 

bereft,  r. 

Lay, 

laid^                 laid. 

Beseech, 

beso'.ight. 

besought. 

Lead, 

led,                  led. 

Bid, 

bid,  bade. 

bidden,  bid. 

Leave, 

left,                 left. 

Bind, 

bound. 

bound. 

Lend, 

lent,                lent. 

Bite, 

i>it. 

bitten,  bit. 

Let, 

let,                  let. 

n.^  Adverb,    (i.'.)  Irregular  verb.    (3.)  For  William  and  inother  apply  Rule  Xl 
C4-.)  Adjective. 

*  Got*.(--n.  is  nearly  obsolete.     Its  compound, ^/b;7o^<f''n,  is  still  m  good  use. 

t  Eidckn  is  nervriy  obsolete.  %  Sjpitt^n' is  nearly  obsolete. 


ENGLISH  GEAMMAR. 


73 


Pt'emtt. 

lmi)<i-)J\d. 

IW.  or  Itifjs.  Fart 

Pre^senf. 

Imperfect.  F 

«; .  or  Pass.  Pari 

>3Teed, 

bled. 

bled. 

*  Lie,  to  lie 

S-.a.. 

Iain. 

hlow, 

blew. 

blown. 

dawn, 

Break, 

broke, 

broken. 

Load, 

loaded, 

laden,  r. 

Breed, 

bred, 

bred. 

Lose, 

lost, 

lost. 

JJring, 

brought. 

brought. 

Make, 

made. 

made. 

iJuild, 

built. 

built^ 

Meet, 

met, 

met. 

.iJurst, 

bxu'rit. 

burst. 

Idow, 

mowed. 

mown.  r. 

liuy, 

bought, 

bought. 

Pav, 

paid, 

paid. 

<Jast, 

cast, 

cast. 

Put., 

pat, 

put. 

€atch, 

caught,  r. 
chief, 

cau^'ht.  r. 

Read, 

read. 

read. 

€hide, 

chidden, chid. 

Kend, 

rent. 

rent. 

l/hoose, 

chose. 

cuosen. 

Rid, 

rid, 

rid. 

Uleave,  Id 

)          , 

Ride, 

rode. 

rode,ridden.| 

i4icb    or 

>  reijular. 

Ring, 

rang,  rang, 

rung. 

adhere. 

) 

Rise, 

rose, 

risen. 

Cleave,  to 
split, 

^  clove o/- cleft,  cleft,  cloven. 

Rive, 
Run, 

rived, 
ran, 

riven, 
run. 

Cling, 

clung, 

chmg. 

Saw, 

saw, 

sawn,  r. 

Clottie, 

clothed, 

clad.  r. 

Say, 

tiaid. 

said. 

<'onK', 

cume, 

corns. 

See, 

&aw, 

seen. 

Cc)6t, 

cost, 

cost. 

Seek, 

sou^iht, 

sought. 

I'row, 

crew,  r. 

crowed. 

Sell, 

sold", 

sold. 

Creep, 

crept. 

crept. 

Send, 

sent. 

sent. 

Cut, 

cut. 

cut. 

Set, 

set. 

set. 

Dare,  to 

\  durst. 

dared. 

Shake, 

sliook, 

shaken. 

Dare,  to 

:-  regular. 

Shape, 

shaped, 

( shaped, 
(      shapen. 

chalhiwe. 

Shave, 

shaved. 

sha\  en.  r. 

Deal, 

'  dealt,  r. 

dealt,  r. 

Sheai- 

sheared. 

shorn. 

I>ig, 

dug,  r. 

dug.  r. 

Shed, 

shed. 

shed. 

Do, 

did, 

done. 

Shine, 

shone,  r. 

shone,  r. 

Drau', 

drew. 

drawii. 

Show, 

showed, 

shown. 

Drive, 

drove. 

driven. 

Shoe, 

shod. 

shod. 

Driuk, 

drank. 

drunk. 

Shoot, 

shot, 

shot. 

Dwell, 

dwelt. 

dwelt,  r. 

Shrink, 

shrunk, 

shrunk. 

7:at, 

eat  or  at^. 

eaten. 

Shred, 

shred. 

shred. 

Fall, 

fell. 

fallen. 

Shut, 

shut. 

shut. 

Feed, 

fed. 

led. 

Sing, 

sung,  sau^, 

sung. 

lU'Cl, 

felt. 

fel'. 

Sink, 

sunk,  sank, 

sunk. 

Vi§lit, 

fought, 

fought. 

Sit, 

sat, 

sat. 

F.ud, 

found. 

found.              1 

Slav, 

slew. 

slain. 

inec, 

fled. 

fled.                 i 

^31eep, 

slent. 

slept. 

.Fling, 

flung. 

flung,               1 

Slide, 

slid. 

slidden- 

yiy, 

flew, 

flown.              j 

Slin^, 

slung, 

sluiig. 

Forgot, 

forgot. 

forgotten,     }  ; 
forgot.      [ 

Slink, 
Slit, 

slunk, 
slit,  r. 

slink. 

slit,rrs]itted. 

Forsake, 

forsook, 

forsaken. 

Smite, 

f^mote, 

smitten. 

Freeze, 

froze, 

frozen.             t 

Sow, 

sowed. 

sown.  r. 

Cet, 

got. 

got.  -            ! 

Speak, 

spoke, 

spoken. 

Oild, 

gilt,  r. 

gilt.  r.             1 

Speed, 

sped, 

sped. 

Oird, 

girt,,  r. 

girt.  r.             I 

S\>end, 

spent. 

spent. 

Give, 

gave. 

given. 

S2)ill, 

spilt,  r. 

spilt,  r. 

Go, 

went, 

gone. 

Spin, 

spun, 

spun. 

Grave, 

graved, 

graven,  r. 

Spit, 

spit,  spat. 

spit,spitton.J 

Grind, 

ground. 

ground. 

Grow, 

grow, 

grown. 

Have, 

had, 

had. 

Split, 

split. 

spht.  r.            1 

aVike, 

took. 

taken. 

*  1 1  See  notes  on  page  72, 

■ 

10 


u 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


Prtent. 

Imiurpd.    F-ri'.  or  7l<>\<t.  Part. 

Present. 

Inqjcrfo-t.    71 

'.  or  Pats.  Part. 

Spread, 

spread, 

spread. 

Teach, 

taught, 

taught. 

Spring, 

sprung, 

sprung, 

■  sprung. 

Tear, 
Tell, 

tore, 
told. 

torn, 
told. 

Stand, 

stood, 

stood. 

Think, 

thought, 

thought. 

Steal, 

Stole, 

stolen. 

Thrive, 

throve,  r. 

thriveu. 

Stick, 

stuck. 

stuck. 

Throw, 

threw, 

thrown. 

Sting, 
Stink, 

stung, 

stung. 

Thrust, 

thrust. 

thrust. 

stunk, 

stunk. 

Tread, 

trod, 

trodden. 

Stride, 

strode,  or 

•  stridden. 

Wax, 

waxed. 

waxen.  /•. 

strid, 

Wear, 

wore. 

worn. 

Strike, 

struck. 

struck  or     \ 
stricken.  J" 

Weave, 
Weep, 

wove, 
wept. 

woven. 
M'ept. 

String, 

strung, 

strong. 

Win, 

MOU, 

won. 

Strive, 

strove. 

striven. 

Wind, 

wound,^ 

wound. 

Strovv  or 
strew, 

)  strowed,  or 
1      strewed. 

strown, 
strowed, 
srrowed. 

Work, 
Wring, 

wrought, 
wrung, 

(  wrought  Of 
)      worked, 
wrung. 

Swear, 

S7\'ore, 

sv.'oi-n. 

Vrnte, 

wrote^, 

written. 

Sweut, 

swet,  r. 

swet.r. 

Swell, 

swelled, 

swollexi.  r. 

Swim, 

swum,  swam,ij^vu:n. 

Swing, 

swung. 

swung. 

553.    We  say,  "I  have  seen,"  "  I  had  seen,"  and  *'  I  am  seen,"  using  the  par- 
ticiple seen  instead  of  the  verb  .raw :  hence, 

Note  VI.  We  should  use  participles,  only,  after  Aare,  and 
had,  and  the  verb  to  be. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"  John  has  loriiten  his  copy.'^ 
551.   Has    icritten    is     an    irregular    active-transitive 
VERB,  from  the  verb  to  rcrite — ''  Pres.  write;  Irfiperf,  wrote* 
Perf.  part,  written.     1.  I  have  written  ;  2.  You  have  writ- 
ten ;  3.  He  or  John  has  written" — found  in  the  indicative 

MOOD,    PERFECT    TEN.SE,    THIRD    PERSON,    SINGULAR    NUMBER,    and 

agrees  with  John,  by  Rule  VII. 

John,  copy,  and  his,  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 


1. 


Job  has  struck  John." 

John  has  been  struck  by  Job." 

The    men    caught    the  thief  in  the 

tavern." 
The  thief  was  caught  by  the  men  in 

the  tavern." 
A  wise  son  will  make  a  glad  father." 


"  The  act  was  done  by  William." 

"  James  found  his  little  brother  in  the 

boat." 
"  The  instructor  makes  good  pens." 
"  The   farmer  ploughs   the   grouud   in 

spring." 
"  I  may  spend  my  time  in  the  country," 


"  John  is  at  home." 

"  Rufus  rode  into  the  country." 

"  The  sun  will  shine." 

"  The  thief  wa.s  confined  in  jail." 

"  The  horse  ran  with  great  violence." 


"  Kc  abode  in  peace." 

"  They  v.'ouId  be  cruel." 

''  Vre'may  have  been  negligent." 

"  The  boys  should  have  been  studious, 

"  William  was  iu  town." 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  75 

3. 

*^If  he  will  ns.sisL  pie,  I  sliali  be  much  still   he    would    uot  recouipens« 

(1.)  obliged  to  him.  me." 

*'  If  he  be  virtuous,  then  he  will  be     "  I  will  write  him,  lest  he  neglect  my 

hiippj-"  business." 

"  If  he  be  happy,  then  I  am  contented."    "  Should  I  be  disappointed,  I  shall  des- 
"Hud  he  mentioned  that  circumstance,  pair." 

I  should  have  avoided  my  present  "  Unless  he  repent,  he  will  not  be  par- 
calamities."  doned." 
"  Although  he  acknowledged  his  faults,  "  Were  I^  in  your  place,  I  would  reUeve 

him." 
4. 
*'  Thou  hast  benefitted  me."  "  Dost  thou  hear  me?" 

"  Ye  make  no  pretensions."  "  Hath  he  many  advisers?" 

"  This  doctrine  hath  no  followers."  "  ^'e  do  always' err." 

"  If  thou  love  me."  *'  Thou  shalt  surely  die." 

"  If  thou  art  more  comfortable,  I  hearti-  "  If  thou  hadst  obeyed  me,  thou  wouldst 
ly  rejoice."  not  have  been  disappointed." 

5. 

"If  Thomas,  who  is  at  school,  return  "  The  task  which  the  instructor  imposed 
in  season,  I  will  visit  you."  was  performed  with  reluctance." 

*'  The  boys  whom  I  admonished  have  "  The  measure  w4iich  he  adopts  will 
reformed."  succeed." 

"  The  man  whose  life  was  in  danger  re-  *'  1  have  known  a  little  child  that  exhib- 
turncd  in  safety."  ited  the  prudence  of  mature  years." 


XLVII.  GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

r).")").  When  I  say,  "John  begins  to  read,"  to  rmd  is  a  verb  in  the  infinitive 
mood  ;  and  it  follows,  as  you  perceive,  the  verb  bifji:is  :  he.nce  w^e  say  that  it  is 
governed  by  hcains. 

"  He  is  beginning;  to  read."  Here,  the  infinitive  follows  the  participle  htgin- 
iiing ;  it  is,  therefore,  governed  by  hnjinninci. 

"He  is  eager  to  learn."  Here',  the  infinitive  follows  the  adjective  eager  ;  we 
therefore  say  that  it  is  governed  by  eagit\ 

"  He  has  an  opportunity  to  learn."  '^Jlcre,  the  inlinitive,  to  ham  is  governed 
by  the  noun  opi^ortunity ,  because  it  follows  the  noun. 

In  like  manner  the  infinitive  may  be  governed  by  pronouns;  as,  "  There  is  a 
fine  opportunity  for  him  to  learn  ■''  hence, 

RUIiS   IIII. 

The  infinitive  mood  may  he  governed  by  verbs,  pariiciples, 

adjectives,  nouns,  and  jprononns , 

EXEilCISES  IN  SYKTAX. 

'■^  James  hcgins  to  learn.'''' 

556.  To  learn  is  a  regular  transitive  verb — "P?^cs. 
learn:  Imperf.  learn;  Perf.  part,  learned" — made  in  the 
INFINITIVE  MOOD,  PRESENT  TENSE,  and  govemed  by  begins, 
agreeably  to  Rule  XII. 

James  and  begins  are  parsed  as  before. 

(^1.)  Adverb.  -See  648.  "'^     " 


76  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

"  George  desires  to  )earn."  "  A  knowledge  of  the  rules  of  prammaf 
"  He  is  eager  to  learn."  teaches  us  to  write  correctly." 

'•'  He  has  a  desire  to  study."  "  lie  should  seek  to  obtain  knowledge." 

"  It  .seems  to  please  John."  "  "We  may  be  tuaght  to  write,  read, 
"  William  has  come  to  see  us."  and  spell.", 

"  Tliey  are  determined  to  excel." 

Omission  of  to,  the  usual  Sign  of  the  infinitive. 

"John    saw  the  man   strike   (1.)   the  "  I  heard  the  clock  strike." 

boy."  "  The  tutor  bade  him  do  it." 

"  The  insTtructor  made  him  submit."  "  The  soldiers  dare  not  rebel." 

"  They  need  not  proceed  in  such  haste."  *' ily  uncle  let  the  boys  play  in  th» 
"See  (2.)  the  blind  beggar  dunce."  garden." 

Note  VII.  The  infinitive  mood  is  sometimes  governed 
b}^  conjunctions  or  adverbs  ;  as  "  The  summit  of  a  mountain 
so  high  as  to  be  invisible." 

EXAMPLES. 

'*  They  are  about  (0.)  to  depart."  "He  desires  no  more  (4.)  than  (5.)  lr> 

**  He  is  wise  enough  (3.)  to  study."  know  his  duty." 


XLYIII. 

557.  TTe  have  before  seen,  that  participles  partake  of  the  nature  cf  two 
parts  of  speech,  namely,  verbs  and  adjectives.  One  point  of  resemblance  which 
participles  have  to  adjectives,  is  in  relerriug  to  some  noun  in  the  s»?ntence  in 
which  they  are  used  ;  as  "  The  sun  is  setting:"  here,  the  partici})Ie  setting  is  said 
to  refer  to  the  noau  sua:  hence, 

ruIjE  xin. 

Participles  refer  to  nouns. 
EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"  The  wind  is  rising.''^ 

558.  Rising  is  a  present  active  participle,  from  the  ir- 
regular verb  to  rise — "  Pres.  rise  ;  Imp.  rose  ;  Perf.  part. 
risen  " — and  it  refers  to  vdnd,  according  to  Rule  XIII. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

1. 

"  The  moon  is  setting."  *'  i»Iary  was  playing." 

"  The  sun  is  rising."  **  I  have  been  writing." 

"  Ti>e  trees  are  growing."  "  I  found  him  crving." 

•'  John  was  dancing."  *'  I  left  him  rejoicing." 

PARTICIPIAL  ADJECTIVES. 

"  The  rising  sun  cheers  us.''' 

559.  Rising  is  a  participial  ADJECTivE,from  ihe  verb  to  rise 

{].)  iS'^rv'/-?  ij!  governed  by  Rule  XII. 
(  *.;  /SV-:  is  in  the  imperative,  a^^reeing  with  tJion  or  you,  understood,  by  Rule  VII. 
(3.)  Adverb. ''  (^i.)  Noun.  (/..)  Conjunction. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  77 

— "  Pres.  rise  ;  Imp.  rose  ;  Perf.j^art.  risen" — and  belongs  to 
sun,  by  Kule  IV. 

e::e?-ctses  ix  syntax  coxtixued. 


"  The  settiucr  sun  reminds  us  of  doclij-  "  Wo  x\qx\-  with  pleasure  the  twinkling 

in  a;  years."'  stars," 

**  The  j-oai  ino;  winds  alarm  us."  "  The  roaring;  cataract  strikes  us  with 
"  The  ripp!ing  stream  pleases  us."  awe." 

"  The  singing-master  visited  me."  "  The  laboring  man  should  not  be  de- 
frauded." 
3. 

"  Haying  dined,  I  returned  to  school."       "  Having     slept,    he     recovered    his 
"  Having  fought  bravely,  they  were  at  strength." 

last  (1.)  overcome."  "  Having  retired  to  rest,  he  was  seized 

"John,  having  exercised  too  violently,  with  violent  p,?in." 

fainted."  '      "  The  thief,  having  escaped,  was  never 

afterwards  seen  in  that  region." 
4. 

"  Williani  returned  mortified  at  his  loss."  "  A  child  left  to  follow  his  own  inclina" 
"  The  stream,  swollen  by  the  rains,  over-  tions  is  most  commonly  ruined." 

IJowed  its  banks." 

**  The  man  accustomed  to  Lis  glass  scl-  "  Admired  and  applauded,  he  became 

dom  reforms."  vain." 

5. 

"  We  must  not  neglect  any  known  duty."  "  A  dissipated  son  grieves  hisparents." 

'' My  fiither  took  the  forsaken  youth  into  "Vrilliam     befriended     the     deserted 

his  own  house,  and  rendered  to  him  man," 

deserved  assistance." 


"The  men,   being  fatigued   by    labor,  admonished  to  no  efTect,  was  se- 

sought  rest  in  sleep."  veroly  and  justly  punished." 

"  William  being  dismissed  from  college,  "  The  tree,  having  been  weighed  down 

retired  to  the  country."  for  a  long  time  by  abundance  of 

"  Thomas,  after  having  been  repeatedly  fruit, at  la.st(l.)feIi*totIie  ground." 

RULS    XIT. 

Active  participles  from  active-transitive  vcrhs,  govern  the  oh- 

jective  case. 

'^  James  is  beating  John.^' 

500.  Jolm  is  a  proper  noun,  of  the  third  pekjon,  singular 

l^UMUER,  MASCULINE  GF.NDES,  OBJECTIVE  CASE,    aud  gOVemed  b}' 

peating,  b}^  Rule  XIV. 

EXERCISES  IX  SYXTAX  COXTIXUED. 

"  John  is  striking  William."  "Having  obtained  my  request,  I  imme- 

"  Sysan  is  studying  her  lesson."  diately  set  oft"  for  Richmond." 

"jiary  has  been  repeating  her  lesson    "  I  spied  the  cat  watching  a  mouse." 


(1.)  At  Ia.?t  is  an  adverbial  phra.sc. 


78  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

-to  her  moiber."  "Rnx^n^  given  dircciious  to  his  ser- 

**The  teamster,  seeing  the  stase  upset-  vants,  he  left  his  faiuily  aud  took 

.ting,  ran  aud  pteventedit."  the  stage  for  Mobile. 

"  He  delights  in  fghti?ig.'^ 
501.  Fighfins^  is  a  participial  noux,  in  the  objective  case, 
and  governed  by  the  preposition  in,  according  to  Rule  X. 

EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX  COXTIXUED. 

1. 

"  Job  was  exhausted  by  wrestling."        "  Job  practices  fencing  dailv.'' 

"Marv   acquired   a  hvelihood  by  sew-  "  The  instructor  teacher  readiug,writing, 

'ino-.'*  3nd  spelliug,  in  his  school." 

*•  Walter  excels  iu  writing."  "  Y\^hispering  is  forbidden  iu  school." 

"  Fisliiug   deiiirhts   me." 

>  2. 

r>G2.  *'  You  will  much  cUigc  me  hy  sending  those  boohs.'" 
Sending  is  a  participial  noun,  in  the  oejective  cafe,  and 
governed  by  the  preposition  by,  according  to  Rule  X. 

Boohs  is  a  co^.i.mon  noun,  of  the  third  person,  plural  nu:,i- 
PER,  neuter  gender,  OBJECTIVE  CASE,  and  governed  by  the 
active  participle  sending,  according  to  Rule  XIV. 

EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX  COXTIXUED. 

"  James  derives  pleasure  from  reading    "  Mary's  reading  has  been  useful  in  im- 
use.'ul  books."  proving  her  taste  in  composition." 

"  John  is  above  doing  a  mean  action."      "  I  am  discouraged  from  undertaking 

'•  Parents  are  pleased'at  seeing  the  pro-  this  stud}-." 

gress  01  their  children."  "  A  good  instructor  takes  no  delight  iu 

punishing." 

The  present  participle,  when  used  as  a  noun,  often  has  the  definite  article  W« 
before  it,  and  the  preposition  of  afier  it ;  as,  "  By  the  observing  of  truth,  you 
will  command  respect."  Vrith' equal  propriety,  however,  it  may  be  said,  "By 
observing  truth,"  dc,  omitting  l)oth  tiie  article  and  the  preposition.  If  we  use 
the  article  v»'ithout  the  preposition,  or  the  preposition  without  the  article,  the  ex- 
pression will  appear  awkward  :  hence. 

Note  Vlll.  The  definite  article  the  should  be  used  before, 
and  the  preposition  of  after,  participial  noans,  or  they 
should  both  be  omitted. 

EXERCISES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

*' By  the  observing  these  rules,  he  will  "In  the    regarding  his  interests,  he 

avoid  mistakes."  neglected  the  pubHc  affairs." 

*'  lie  prepared  them  for  the  event  by  "  lie  was  sent  to  prepare  the  w.ay  by 

the  sending  to  them  proper  iufor-  preaching  of  repentance." 

matiou."  "Keeping  of  one  day  in  seven  (1.)  is 

"  In  writing  of  his  letter,  he  made  some  required  of  C'hriistians." 
mistakes. 


{I.)  Seven  is  a  numeral  adjective,  belonging  to  daps,  understood,  by  Note  I. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  79 

PROMISCUOUS  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

^'William   calls  George."  most  shamefully."   , 

*' John's  father  will  reward  his  indus-  "John  will  be  puuishecf  for  his  inso- 

try."  ^^  Icuce." 

■"  George's  father's  carnage  passed  the  "  V>''e    may    improve    under    our   in- 

tavern."  structor,  it  we  chr ose." 

"  If  William   return,   he  will  be  disap-  "  Ke     who     would   excel   in   learning,  • 

pointed."  must  be  attentive  to  his  books." 

"'John  has  beaten  his  little    brother  *' She  begins  to  improve." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

TifiS.  Will  you  compose  a  sentence,  containing  an  active-transitive  verb?  One, 
containing-  a  neuter  verb  '?  One,  containing  a  passive  verb  V  One,  eipressiug 
the  same  sense  as  the  last  in  an  active  loruiV  Will  3'ou  compose  a  sentence 
having  a  verb  in  the  potential  mood?  One,  in  the  subjunctive  mood?  One,  in 
the  imperative  mood  V  One,  in  the  infinitive  mood  V  One,  havmg  an  adjectivu 
in  the  superlative  degree?  One,  having  tiie  article  an  correctly  used  before  a 
vowel?  One,  having  an  adjective  in  the  positive  degree  that  has  in  itself  a  super- 
lative signification?  One,  containing  the  relative  ^chose?  One,  containir;.'!; 
vkiehf  One,  with  ivliat  used  as  a  compound  pronoun?  One,  having  wvio  Ubcd  • 
as  an  interrogative  pronoun?  One,  having  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  com- 
mon form? 

Will  you  construct  one  or  more  sentences,  v/hich  will  make  sense  with  the 
■word  twill  contained  in  them?  One,  with  the  word  vym/c??i  contained  in  it? 
One;  with  the  word  kuowltdijuf  One,  with  the  word  Uarniufjf  One,  with  the 
•word  scknctf 

Will  you  construct  a  sentence  about  prudence?  One  about  liistory?  One  or 
more  on  the  following  subjects,  namely,  ijeogrophij,  gardeniivj,  farms,  orchards? 

Will  you  fill  up  the  following  phrases  with  suitable  words  to  make  sense, 

namely,  "  Industry health  ?"     "  By  —  we  acquire ?"     "  In  youth 

characters ?'^     "  Arithmetic business?"    "  Washington live 

hearts  of  his ?" 


XLIX.  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

5()4.  The  verbs  have,  he,  tvill  and  do,  when  they  art  unconnected  with  a  prin- 
cipal verb,  expressed  or  understood,  are  not  auxiliaries,  but  ])riucipal  verbs;  as, 
*'  We  have  enough ;"  ''  I  am  grateful ;"  "  lie  nillff  it  to  be  so ;"  "  They  do  as  they 
please."  In  this  vie'./,  they  also  have  their  auxiliaries;  as,  "I  ihaU  haid 
enough;"  "  I  ivill  be  grateful,"  <tc. 

505.  The  peculiar  force  of  the  several  auxiliaries  will  appear  from  the  follow- 
ing account  of  them. 

5(56.  Do  and  didmRrk  the  action  itself,  or  the  time  of  it,  with  greater  energy 
and  positiveness ;  as,  "  I  do  speak  truth  ;"  "  I  did  respect  him ;"  '•  Here  am  I,  for 
thou  didst  call  me."  They  are  of  great  use  in  negative  (1.)  sentences  ;  as,  "  i  do 
■not  lear;"  "  I  did  not  write."  They  arc  almost  universally  employed  in  asking 
ifiuestious  ;  as,  *■*  Does  he  learn?"  '^^*  Did  he  not  write  ?"  Thej- sometimes  al&o 
iiupply  (2.)  the  phice  of  another  verb,  and  make  the  repetition  of  it,  in  the  sanse 
or  a  subsequent  sentence,  unnecessary;  as,  "  You  attend  not  to  your  studies  as 
he  does  ;"  (i.  e.  "  as  he  attends,"  &c,)  "  I  shall  come,  if  I  can  ;  but  if  I  do  not, 
please  to  excuse  me ;"  (i.  e.  "  if  I  come  not,") 

5*17.  May  and  might  express  the  possibility  or  liberty  of  doing  a  thing;  can 
and  coaZrZ,  the  powder;  as,  "  It  may  rain  ;"  "I  may  write  or  read^;"  "  He  might 
have  improved  more  than  he  has;"  "lie  can  write  much  better  than  he  could 
last  year." 

568.    M-ust  is  Eonictimes  called  in  for  a  helper,  and  denotes  necessity ;  as. 


(1.)  Denying.  (2.)  To  lill  up. 


80  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

»'  "We   must  sneak   the  truth,  whenever  \vc   do  speak,  aud  we  uuist  not  i^n- 
yaricatc."  (1.; 

C&J.  IVill,  in  thn  first  jtersoQ  singular  and  plural,  intimates  (■_'.)  resolution 
and  promisini^;  in  the  second  and  third  person,  it  only  torelelLs;  as,  "1  will  ve- 
A^ard  the  izood,  and  will  punish  the  wicked;"  "  We  will  remember  beuelits,  and 
be  grate! al ;"  "  Thou  wilt,  or  he  will,  repent  of  that  lolly  ;"  '•  You,  or  they,  wiir 
Lave  a  pleasant  walk." 

570.  Shell,  on  the  contrary,  in  the  first  person,  simply  foretells;  In  the 
second  and  third  persons,  it  promises,  commands,  or  threatens;  as,  **  I  shall  ^r  > 
abroad;"  "  We  sdall  diuc  at  home;"  "Thou  shalt,  or  you  shall,  inherit  the 
land;"  "Ye  shall  do  justice,  and  love  mercy;"  "They  shall  account  tor  their 
misconduct."  The  following  passage  is  not  translated  (3.)  according  to  the  dis- 
tinct and  proper  meanings  of  the  words  ;:iuaU  and  ivill :  **  iSurely  goodness  and 
mercv  shall  follow  me  all  the  days  of  my  life  ;  and  I  will  dwell  in  the  house  of  thu 
Lord'for  ever."  It  ought  to  be,  "  2i'i'/(;  follow  me,"  and,  "  I  *Vta/^  dwell."— Th« 
foreigner  who,  as  it  is  said,  f-'ll  into  tiia  Thames,  and  cried  out,  "  I  u'ill  be 
dro'.'.Micd  1  nobody  6'7<.a^^  help  me  !"  made  a  sad  uiisapplication  of  these  auxiliiwies. 
671.  These  observations  res])ecting  the  import  (4.)  of  the  verbs  will  andshall, 
must  be  understood  of  explicative  sentences  ;  for  when  the  sentence  is  interroga- 
tive, just  the  reverse,  (5.;  for  the  most  part,  takes  place:  thu..,  "I  fkall  go," 
••  You  7i'i/({  go,"  express  invent  (6.)  ouly;  but,  "  WUi  you  go  V"  imports  inten- 
tion ;  and,  '^ , Shall  1  go  V"  refers  to  the  will  of  another.  But,  "  He  s/uill  go,"  and, 
"  :Sh'all  he  go  V"  both  imply  \vill ;  expressing  or  referring  to  a  command. 

572.  When  the  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  mood  the  meaning  of  these  aui- 
iliavics  likewise  undergoes  (7.)  some  alteration  ;  as  the  learn'ers  will  readily  per- 
ceive by  a  few  examples :  "  lie  shall  proceed  ;"  "  If  he  shall  proceed  ;  "  You  s/i<ill 
consent ;"  "  If  yoa  fihaU  consent."  These  auxiliaries  are  sometimes  interchanged 
(3.)  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods;  to  convey  the  same  meaning  of  tha 
auxiliary;  as,  "  He  ty;;//!  not  reiuru ;"  ^'Ifhedhall  not  return;"  "He  shall  not 
return;"  "  If  he  ivill  not  return." 

570.  Would  primarily  (9.)  denotes  inclination  of  will ;  and  should,  obligation; 
but  they  both  vary  tbeir'import,  and  are  often  used  to  express  simple  event. 

"(74.  Do  and  have  are  sometimes  used  as  principal  verbs,  according  to  the 
following 

SYNOPSIS. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  I  do.  I  have. 

Mp.  I  did.  I  had. 

J'f/.  I  have  done.  1  have  had. 

J'luj).  I  had  done.  I  had  had. 

1.  Fut.  I  shall  or  will  do.  1  shall  <>r  will  have. 

'2.  Fut.  1  shall  have  done.  I  ^hail  have  had. 

575.                                     POTENTIAL  ,MOOD. 

PrcK.    T  nifiy  0^'  c^^  *^^-  I  "^^7  ^'^  can  have. 

/<«>).     I  mighl-.  could,  would,  or  should     I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

do. 
jWf.    I  may  or  can  havo  done.  I  may  or  can  have  had. 

Jilip.  I  might,  could,  would,  or  should     I  might,   could,  would,  or  should  have 
have  done.  had. 

57G.     '  SUBJUXCTIV2  MOOD. 

Pres.  1.  If  I  cJo.  If  I  have,  kc. 

57,r-l.  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.    Do  you,  or  Do  yoti  do.  Have  you,  or  Do  you  have. 

(1.)  To  shun  the  truth.         (i.jShows.         (S.)  Expressed.         (4.)  Meaning.  , 
'      (5.)  Contrary.     (»>.)  What  happens.      (7. ")  Sailers.     (S.)  To  exchange  one  for 
tbeother,  "        (?    In -he  first  place. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  8i 


m.  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

P.-ri^.     To  do.  To  bavo. 

Brf.    To  have  done.  *                   To  have  had. 

5:8.  PARTICirLES. 

Fres.    Doing.  Having. 

Ferf.    Done.  *                          Had. 

<:Q?nj>. per/.  Having  done.  Having  had. 

0 


L.    OF  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

579.  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  used  only  in 
some  of  the  moods  and  tenses. 

580.  The  following  are  the  principal  ones  : 

F/'^.  Tense.  hn]).  Tense.  Ferf.  Fariidplt. 

May,  iOght,  (Wanting.) 

Can,  Could,  

Will,  Would,  

Shall,  Should,  

Must,  Must,  

Ought,  Ought,  

Quoth,  

551.  Of  these,  ou<iht  and  must,  you  perceive,  are  not  varied. 
'  582.  Ongld  and  quotii  are  always  used  as  prinopal  verbs.  OugJd  is  the  same 
in  the  imperfect  tense  as  in  the  present,  and  is  always  followed  by  au  infinitive  ;  as 
"  He  ought  to  study ;"  "  He  ought  to  have  read."  In  this  last  example,  ought  is  in 
the  imperfect ;  and  in  the  first,  it  is  in  the  present.  This  we  determine  by  the  in- 
finitive, which  follows  the  verb,  thus  :  when  the  present  infinitive  follows  ouglity 
ought  is  in  the  present  tense  ;  but  when  the  perlect  infinitive  follows  it,  it  is  in 
the  imperfect  teuse. 

583.  In  English,  verbs  are  often  used  both  in  a  transitive  and  intransitive,  or 
neuter  sigbification.  Thus,  to  Jhttten,  wlieu  it  signifies  to  matt  even  or  level,  is 
an  active-transitive  verb  ;  but  when  it  signifies  to  grow  dull  or  inalpid,  it  is  au 
intransitive  verb. 

584.  A  neuter  or  intransitive  verb,  by  the  addition  of  a  preposition,  may  be- 
come a  compound  active-transitive  verb;  as,  to  «/i?7e  is  intransitive ;  it  cannot, 
taerefore,  be  followed  by  au  objective  case,  nor  be  changed  into  the  passive  form. 
We  cannot  say,  "She  smiled  him,"  or,  "He  was  smiled ;"  but  we  say,  very 
ptoperly,  "  She  smiled  on  him;"  "He  was  smiled  on  by  her." 

585.  Prepositions  affect  the  meaning  of  verbs  in  different  ways.  To  cast 
"means  to  tlnoio ;  as,  "He  cast  a  stone  at  her."  7b  ca."^^  1//',  however,  means  ^o 
compute;  as,  "He  casts  up  his  accounts."  In  all  instances  in  vrhich  the  prepo- 
sition follows  the  verb,  aud  modifies  its  meaning,  its  should  be  considered  a  part 
of  the  verb,  and  be  so  treated  in  parsing. 

586.  There  are  some  verbs,  which,  although  they  admit  an  objective  case 
after  them  still  do  not  indicate  the  least  degree  oi  action;  as,  "I  resemble  my 
father."  This  seeming  inconsistency  may  be  easily  reconciled  by  reftoctingthat, 
in  all  such  cases,  the  verb  has  a  direct  reference  to  its  object.  Of  this  nature  are 
the  verbs  retain,  resemble,  own,  have,  &c. 

587.  Some  neuter  or  intransitive  verbs  admit  of  a  passive  form,  and  are 
thence  called  neuter  passive  verbs  ;  as,  "  John  ^i;oes  home  to-night."  Here  goes 
is  an  intransitive  verb.  But  in  the  sentence,  "John  is  gone  home,"  is  genesis  a 
neuter  passive  verb.  Again,  in  the  phrase,  "William  comes,"  cowes  is  an  in- 
transitive verb;  and  in  the  phrase,  "William  is  come,"  it  come  is  a  neuter  pas^ 
sive'verb. 

11 


82  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

1. 

"William   harl  had   mauy  advantages    "He  haejiad  many  piecious  oppoiin- 
beforc  heimproved  them  iu  u  prop-  nities." 
cr  iiianuer."                                            "  Hs  may  have  had  time." 

"A  good  scholar  will  not  do  what  (1.)     "John    will  do   as  his    instructor  di- 
is  forbidden  by  his  instructor."  rects." 

2. 

"I  own  this  book."  "  I  cannot  believe  him." 

"  Charles  resembles  his  parents."  "  His  father  does  not  hesitate  to  trust 

"  He  retains  his  place."  him." 

3. 

"The    farmer    casts     seed     into     the  "  She  smiles  sweetly." 

ground."  "  She  smiled  on  John." 

"The  merchant  casts  up  his  accounts  "John  was   smiled  on  by  fortune  ifi 
often."  every  undertaking." 

4. 
"  The  instructor  ha;*  come."  "  When  they  came  to  town,  they  made 

"Our  instructor  has  come."  many  purchases." 

"  William  has  gone  to  visit  his  parents."  "  Mary  was  gone  before  her    mother 
"Susan  has  gon«."  came." 


LI.    OF  ADVERBS. 

588.  Adverbs  are  words  joined  to  verbs,  participles,  ad- 
jectives, and  other  adverbs,  to  qualify  them. 

,589.  Expressions  like  the  following,  namely,  a  feio  dmjs  ago,  long  since,  none 
at  all,  at  length,  in  vain,  hy  vo  means,  a  great  deal,  &c.,  are  denominated  adverbial 
phra-ses,  when  they  are  used  to  qualify  verbs  or  participles,  by  expressing  the 
manner,  time  or  degree  of  action. 

590.  The  definite  article  t/ie  is  frequently  placed  before  adverbs  of  the  com- 
parative and  superlative  degrees,  to  ^ive  the  expression  more  force;  as,  "  The 
'more  he  walks,  the  better  he  feels."  When  the  article  is  used  in  this  sense,  both, 
the  article  and  adverb  may  be  reckoned  an  adverbial  phrase,  and  be  so  consid- 
ered in  parsing. 

591.  You  have  doubtless  noticed  that  most  words  ending  in  li/  are  adverbs. 
The  reason  of  this  is  that  /yis  a  contraction  of  the  adverb  li/ce :  thus,  from  mun- 
Uke  we  form  manly :  (jentlernanly  is  a  contraction  of  gentlemanlihe. — Hence, 

592.  If  you  meet  with  a  word  ending  in  ly,  implying  in  its  signification  the 
idea  of  li/ce,''yon  may  conclude  at  once  that  it  is  an  adverb. 

RULB    IX. 

Adverh.%    qualify    verbs,    participles,    adjectives,   and  other 

adverbs. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

^^  In  vain  we  look  for  perfect  Jiappiness" 


(\.)  What  stands  for  "  that  which,"  or,  "the  thing  which."    Apply  Rules  V.,  VI. 
^    '  and  VIII. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  83 

593.  In  vain  is  an  .adverbial  phrase,  and  qualifies  look, 
according  to  Rule  IX. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

"  John  has  come  again,  but  WiUiam  has  "  \Yilliam  acted  very  nobly." 

not."  <*  T  will  bv  no  means  consent." 

"  Very  many  persons  fail  of  happiness."  "He  wrote  a  long  letter  a  few  dayfe 

ago."  (1.) 
"A  vast  many  evils  are  incident  to  man  "John  was  writing  carelessly." 

in  bis  wearisome  journey  through  "  I    have    admonished    her    once   and 
life."  again." 

"  The  instructress  has  at  length  arrived."  "  A  few  days  ago,  there  was  much  ex- 
citement in  town." 

Note  IX.  To  qualify  verbs,  participle?;,  adjectives,  and 
other  adverbs,  we  should  use  adverbs;  but  to  qualify  nouns,* 
"vve  should  use  adjectives. 

SENTENCL.S  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  Willifvm  writes  good."  *  "  Harriet  dresses  neat." 

"Susan  studies  diligent."  "  On  conditions  suitably  to  his  rank." 

"lie  speaks  fluently   and   reasons   cor-  "  Ho  speaks  correct." 

rect."  "  Mary  sings  admirable." 

"John  writes  tolerable  well,  but  reads  f  "  He  writes  elegant." 

miserable."  "  He  reads  and  spells  very  bad." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  V^RITTEN. 

.'94.  Vrill  you  write  down  a  sentence,  containing  a  compound  active-transiliva 
Terb?  .  One,  having  a  nc'.iter-pasiive  verb? 

Will  you  compose  two  or  more  sentences  about  a  lion  ?  Two  or  more,  about 
tlturp  ?  Two  or  more,  about  a  cni-j  f  One,  about  an  ox  P  One,  a])out  a  dogf  On« 
about  «m?!  .2*  One,  about  Africans?  One,  about  Indians?  One,  Siho\xi  fahes  ? 
One,  about  dcam-hoat  disasters?    One,  about  stag-Q  accidente/ 


LIT.   OF   rREPOSlTIONS. 

595.  Prepositiuns  are  used  to  connect  v/ords,  and  to  show 
the  relation  between  them. 

596.  We  not  unfrequeutly  meet  with  verbs  compounded  of  a  preposition  and 
verb  ;  as,  "  to  ?/;/nold,"  "  to  sJ/ivest,"  "  to  ocerlook  ;"  and  this  composition  some- 
times gives  anew  sense  to  the  verb;  as,  "to  ■y/^/erstand,"  "to  e^vY/^draw."  But 
the  preposition  more  frequently  occurs  cfter  the  verb,  a,nd  separate  from  it;  as, 
"  to  cast  v^;,"  "  to  fall  rw>."  The  sense  of'  the  verb,  in  this  case,  is  also  materially 
affected  by  the  preposition. 

59S.  The  prepositions  aHei\  before,  abave,  beneath,  and  several  others,  some- 
times appear  to  be  adverbs,  and  may  be  so  considered  ;  as,  "  They  had  their  re- 
ward soon  after  f'  "  He  died  not  long  before  f  "  He  dwells  above :''  but  if  the 
noun  ^vj/ze  or  »/ac^(j  be  added,  they  lose  their  adverbial  form ;  as,  "  He  died  not 
long  before"  [that  time,]  &c. 

,599.  There  is  a  pecuhar  propriety  in  distinguishing  the  correct  use  of  the 
difterent  prepositions.    For  illustration,  we  will  take  the  following  sentences  • 

(1.)  .l/(Jitt.t?crysa^<?— an  adverbial  phrase. 
*  For  the  adjective  gnnd,  we  should  use  the  adverb  'well,  according  to  Note  II 
t  Rends  agrees  with  John,  understood,  and  is,  therefore,  eonB«ete«lwitk  ttrpfrj 
1»T  the  eonjnncti«n  hd,  agreeably  to  Rule  XI. 


84  ENGLISH  GF^AMMAR. 

•'  He  walks  ivith  a  stnfT^y  moonlight;"  He  was  taken  hy  stratagem,  and  killed 
with  a  sword."  Put  the  one  preposition  for  the  other,  and  say,"*"  He  walks  by 
a  staff  icith  moonlight ;"  "  He  was  taken  with  stratagem,  and  killed  by  a  sword  ; ' 
and  it  will  appear  that  they  difier  iu  signification  more  than  one,  at  hi  it  view, 
would  be  apt  to  imagine. 

Prepositions  govern  the  ohjective  case. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  John  lives  within  his  income.''' 

600.   Within  is  a  preposition. 

Income  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  tiiip.d    person,   singul.'^r 

NUMBER,  neuti:r  GENDER,  CEJECTivE  CASE,  aiid  govertiecl  by 

within  according  to  Rule  X. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

♦'  Thomas  made  his  fortune  by  industry."  "  He  made  the  sun  to  shine  by  day,  and 

"Susan  labors  with  her  needle  for  a  life-  the  moon    (1.)   to  give  light  by 

libood."  night." 

"Respectingthataffair, there wasacon-  "Beneath  the  oak  lie  acorns  in  great 


troversy. 


abundance. 


*' InsixdaysGrod  made  the  world,and  all    "John,  who  is  at  all  times  watchful  of 
things  that  are  in  it."  his  own  interest,  will  attend  to  that 

concern." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

601.    Will  you  fill  up  the  following  sentences  with  suitable  prepositions  to 

make  sense?     "  John  was  —  the  house  when  ho  vras  seized a  fit."    "The 

busy  bee  —  summer  provides  food — the  approaching  winter  —  the  prudence  — a 
rational  being." 

Will  you  supply  the  objects  to  l^ie  following?"     "James  was  catching ." 

"  He  was  beating^ ."     "  He  supports ." 

Will  you  supply  agents  or  nominative  cases  to  the  following? was  run- 

ninf>-."     " was  dancing." 

Will  vou  supply  verbs  in  the  following?    "  A  dutiful  child his  parents." 

"  Grammar  ■ us correctly." 

Will  yoa  comnosc two  or  more  sentences  about  boys?  One,  about  wTiales? 
One  about sMfiKsV  One,  aboMt foxes?  One,  ahontpm'ents ?  One,ahoMibiothers? 
One  about  sisters  f    One,  abont  uudes F    One,  about  aunts  .^ 


LIII.  OF  CONJUNCTIONS. 

602.  A  CONJUNCTION  is  a  word  that  is  chiefly  used  to  con- 
nect sentences,  so  as,  out  of  two  or  more  sentences,  to  make 
but  one. 

603  Rela+ive  pronoun's,  as  well  as  conjunctions,  serve  to  connect  sentences; 
•>"    "Blessed  is  the  man  wlu)  feareth  the  Lord." 

604.    Conjunctions  very  often  unite  sentences  when  they  ^.^Pj^'^ar  to  unite  only 

rds; 
gences. 


words^-  as  in  the  following  sentences  :     "  Duty  and  interest  foroid  vicio,us  indul- 
ffences'."   '"  Wisdom  or  folly  governs  us."    Each  of  these  forms  of  expression 


(1  )  The  sense  is,  "  He  made  the  moon."    Mxm,  then,  is  in  theobjective  easo, 
<yoTorned  by  made  understood,  a!id  connected  with  sun,  by  Rule  XI. 


ENGLISH  GIIAMMAR.  65 

contains  two  sentences,  namely;  the  first,  "  Duty  forbids  vicious  indulpencea  ;" 
"lutyrest  forbids  vicious  indulgences  :".  the  second,  "  Wisdom  governs  us;" 
"  Folly  governs  us."  ^ 

RULE   XL 

Conjunctions  connect  verbs  of  the  sam^'.  mood  and  tense,  and 

nouns  or  jyronoinis  of  the  same  case. 

EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX. 

605»  "  JVilliam  writes  and  cipher s.^^ 

And  is  a  copulative  conjunction. 

Ciphers  is  a  regular  active-intransive  verb,  from  the  verb 
to  cipher — ^^Pres.  c\pher  ;  Imperf.  ciphered;  Per.  part,  ci- 
phered. 1.  I  cipher;  2.  You  cipher;  3.  Ke  or  William  ci- 
3)hers" — made  in  the  indicative  mood,  present  tense,  third 
PERS(»N  singular,  and  aG:rees  with  JVillimn,  ur.derstood,  and 
is  connected  to  wHtes  by  the  conjunction  and,  agreeably  to 
Rule  X.I. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 
*'  John  ciphers  rapidly,  and  reads  cor-    "  Though  he  is  lively,  yet  he  is  not  too 

rectly."  volatile." 

"If  we  contend  about  trifles,  and  vio-    "  If  he  has  promised,  he  should  act  ac- 
lently  maintain  our  opinions,  we  cordinirly." 

shall  gain  but  few  friends."  "  He  denied  that  he  circulated  the  re- 

port." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

CM.  Will  you  compose  a  sentence  containin^x  the  conjunction  if?  One,  con- 
taining a/^<i.^  As  many  sentences  as  there  are  conjunctions  which  follow;  each 
sentence  containing  one?  Although.  UrdcJ^s.  For.  Because.  Th^efore,  Or. 
Neitlier,    Nor. 

V/ill  you  compose  a  sentence  about  Stonezcall  Jackson?  One,  about  Calhoun? 
One,  about  Monroe?    One,  about  Madison,?    One,  about  Govenior  Allen  ? 


LIV.  OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

G07.  Interjections  are  words  thrown  in  betv/een  the  parts 
of  sentences,  to  express  the  passions  or  sudden  feelings  of 
the  speaker. 

608.  We  do  not  .say,  "Ah,  I!"  "0,1!"  but,  "Ah,  me!"  "Oh,  me!"  using 
the  objective  case  after  the  interjection.  The  pronoun  here  spoken  of,  you  per- 
ceive, is  of  the  first  person  :  henctr, 

Note  X.  Pronouns  of  the  first  person  are  put  in  the  objec- 
tive case,  after  the  interjections  Oh  !  O  I  ah  I  &c. 

600.  We  say,  "  0  thou  persecutor!"  "Oh,  ye  hypocrites!"  "O  thou  who 
dwellest,"  &c. :  hence,  '    • 

Note  XI.  The  interjections  O  !  oh  I  and  ah  !  require  the 
nominative  case  of  pronouns  in  the  second  person. 


SG  ENGLISH  GRAxMMAR. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
610  ''Ah,:?te!   I  must  p fin ^h' 

Ah  is  an  ircTERJEcriox. 

Me  is  a.  PERSONAL     PR<>NOUV.    Oi'  l\lQ    FIRST  Pi^KSOX,  SINGULAR, 

OBjECTivi:  CASE,  and  governed  by  ah,  agreeably  to  ?'^ote  X. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

'•  0,  thou  (1..  who  hast  murdered  tb}'    "Ah!  unhappy  (-2.)  thon,  who  art  dea 
friend!"  "  (3.J  to  the  calls  of  duty  and  honor." 

*'  0,  thnu  who  hcarsst  prayer!"  "  Oh !  happy  (4.)  us,  surrounded  with  so 

'•  Ah,  nie!  must  I  endure  all  thisV"  many"rjlessinj.j.s." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  ^VRITTEN. 
611.    "Will  you  compose  a  sentence  containing  «7as.?    One,  containing  oh? 
One,  about  volcanoes?    One,  about  lakes?    One,   about  idamh?    One,   about 
Webster,  the  statesman  ?    One,  about  a  good  scholar  ?    One,  about  a  poor  scholar  ? 
One,  about  a  good  uistrucior? 


LV.  OF  THE  AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS. 

Gi2.  Apposition,  in  graminar,  signifies  the  patting  of  two 
iioans  in  the  same  c;ise 

P.13.  When  I  say,  "John,  the  mechanic,  has  come,"  I  am  speaking  of  only  one 
person  ;  the  two  nouns  John  and  medtanic,  bofh  nieuuing  or  referring  to  the'sam* 
person ;  consequently  they  are  put,  by  apposi:ion,  in  the  same  case  :  hence, 

When  two  or  7nore  -nouns,  in  ike  same  sentence,  signify  the 
same  thivo;.  Vhpij  are  put,  hy  appositior,  in  the  same  case. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
614.  "  Wiihsler  the  states?nan  has  left  us." 

Statesman  is  a  common  noun,  mascuhne  gender,  third  per- 
son, SINGITLAR  T'UMRER,  NOMINATIVE  CASE,  Jllld  put  in  apposltiOH 

with  Webster,  by  IIuleXV. 

E?:ERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

1. 

*' John  the  Baptist  was  beheaded,"  "Cicero,  the  orator,  flourished  in  the 

"  David,  the  thief,  was  apprehended."  time  of  Catiline,  the  conspirator." 

.♦•  Johnson,  the  bookseller,  has  failed  in     "I    visit    Thompson,    the    professor, 

business."  often." 

"  I  consulted  Williams,  the  lawyer."         "  John,  the  miller,  died  yesterday." 

2. 
"  If  John   will  cot  go,  I  will  go  my-    "  We     will     inspect    the    goods    our- 

self."  (5.)  ^  selves." 

"  You  yourself  are  in  fault."  "  I,  I  am  the  man  who  committed  the 

**  They  themselves  were  mistaken."  deed." 

(1.)  For  fho>j;  applv  Note  XI.  (2.)  Agrees  with  fhot/,  by  Rule  IV. 

(3.-^  TJ-^lono-*  i.->  '/!•/-.■.  bv  Rnle  TV.     (^-.^  Apply  Rule  IV. 
(o.)  Mi/self  is  a  compound  person.il  pronoun,  first  person,  singular,  nomina- 
tirc  cjise,  and  put  in  apposition  with  /,  by  Rule  XV. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  87 

Eemarh  1. — L'or  the  same  reason  that  one  noun  agrees  with  another  in  case, 
it  agrees  with  it  in  number  and  person  also. 

"  I,  Alexander,  by  the  grace   of  God,     '*  We,  the  representatives  of  the  people 
emperor  of  all  the  Russians,  pro-  of    tliese   colonies,    do    make    this 

mulgate  this  law."  declaration." 

_  Ilemarh  2.— When  one  noun  describes  or  qualifies  another,  the  one  so  quali- 
fying becomes  an  adjectife  iu  sense,  and  may  be  so  considered  in  parsing. 
Accordingly,  Treinont,  in  the  phrase,  "  Tremont  House,"  is  an  adjective  belong- 
ing to  IIov.sc,  hy  Rule  IV. 

615.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"The  Marlborough   Hotel  is  situated  "  John  Dobson  was  in  town  vesterdav." 

in  Waohiugtou  street."  "  John   Joliuson,   the  blacksmith,  hus 

"  The  firm  of  Messrs.  Williams  &  Sons,  broken  hi.s  leg." 
has  failed." 

Iiemarh  3. — "When  the  nouns  which  refer  to  the  same  pcr;ton  or  ihii;<:  v.iq  t^cp?.- 
rated  by  verbs  ;  as,  "  Vr^ebster  is  a  statesman,"  it  is. customary  to  apply  oue  or 
more  of  the  following  rules : 

1.  Anij  verb  may  liave  the  sajne  case  ofUr  it  as  bf/ore  it,  ivhiin  bcHi,  ivoi-ds  ruj'cr  to 
the  same  thing. 

2.  The  verb  to  be,  through  all  its  variations,  has  the  same  case  after  it  as  that 
which  next 2)recedes  it. 

3.  Passive  verbs  of  naming,  judging,  d'c.  have  the  same  cane  oftur  them  as  before 
thsiii. 

4.  Neuter  verbs  have  the  same  case  after  them  as  before  them. 

616.  The  foregoing  rules,  in  the  opinion  of  the  writer,  are  wholly  unneces- 
sary, tending  merely  to  confuse  the  mind  of  the  learner  by  requiring  him  to 
make  a  distinction  in  form,  when  there  exists  none  in  principle,  la  corrob- 
oration of  this  fact,  Mr.  Murray  has  the  following  remark  : — 

617.  "  By  these  examples  it  appears,  that  the  verb  to  be  has  no  government  o^ 
case,  but  serves  iu  all  its  forms  us  a  conductor  to  the  cases  ;  £o  thr.t  the  two  cases 
which,  in  the  construction  of  the  sentence,  are  the  next  before  and  after  it,  must 
always  be  alike.  Perhaps  this  subject  will  be  more  intelligible  by  observing  that 
the  words,  in  the  cases  preceding  and  following  the  verb  to  be,  may  be  said  to  be 
in  apposition  to  each  other.  Thus,  in  the  sentence,  'I  understood  it  to  be  him  * 
the  words  it  and  him  are  iu  apposition  ;  that  is,  they  refer  to  the  same  thing,  and 
are  in  the  same  case." 

618.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

1. 

"  Webster  is  a  statesman."  ,       "  She  moves  a  queen."  (1.) 

"  John  is  a  good  scholar."  '    •   "  JuUus  Cec-sar  was  that  Roman  general 

*'  William  will  become  a  distinguished  who  conquered  the  Gauls." 

and  valuable  citizen."  "  Tom  struts  a  soldier."  (1.) 

"  She  walks  a  queen."  (1.)  "  Will  sneaks  a  sciivencr." 

•'He  is  styled  Lord  (i.)  Mayor  (1.)  of    "Claudius    Nero,   Caligula's  uncle,   a 

London."  senseless    fellow,     obtained    the 

«'  He  was  named  John."  (1.)  kingdom." 

2. 
"  Susan  took  her  to  be  Mary."  (1.)  (.2)  Adams."  (1.) 

"  I  took  him  to  be  John  (2. )  Ogden."        "  She  is  not  now  the  person  whom  they 
*' We  at  first  took  it  to  be  her,  but  after-  represented    her     (1.)     to     have 

wards  were  convinced  that  (3.)  been." 

it  was  not  she." 


a.)  Apply  Rule  XV.        (2.)  Remark  2.        (3.)  CoDJunction. 


88  ENGLISH  GRAMMAIL     ' 

"He  is  not  the  person  who  (4.)  il  seem-  "Whom   (D.)   do  you  fancy   ihem    to 

edhewas."  be?" 

"  I  uuderstood  it  to  be  him  (1.)  w'  professor  was  appointed  tutor  to 

the  son  of  Mr.  (2.)  John  Q.  ..le  prince." 

Bemarh  3. — It  not  unfrequently  happens  that  the  connecting  verb  is  omitttid; 
ag,  "  They  made  hin:  captai;'. ;"  that  is,  to  be  captain. 

3. 

"They   named   him  John."  "  Tlv-y  procU.imed  him  khisr." 

"  The  soldiers  made  him  o-eneral."  "  His  countrymen    crowned    him   am- 

peror." 

619.     SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"It  mi^ht  have  been  him,  (G.)  but  there  "She  is  the  person  who  I  understood 
is  no  proof  (7.)   of  it."  it  to  have  been." 

"  Though   I  vras  bhvmed,  it  could  not  "  Who  do  you  think  me  to  be  ?" 

have   been   me."  "Whom  do  men  say  that  I  ain  V" 

"  I  saw  one  who  I  took  to  be  she."  "  Whom  think  ye  that  I  am?" 

rj20.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compose  a  sentence  having  nouns  in  apposition?  One,  having  noung 
in  apposition,   but  separated  by  a  verb?    One,  having  a  noun   used  as  an 

Ji(ll6CtiVG  ? 

Will  you  construct  a  sentence  having  in  it  the  word  wliof  One,  having 
ivhose?  One,  having  v:liom,f  One,  having  wMt?  One,  having  that?  One, 
having  mem?  One,  having  woman?  One,  having  buy?  One,  having  girUf 
One,  liaving  imrmU? 


LVL  OF  NOUI\^S  USED  INDEPENDENTLY. 

621.  To  a^'ir^As signifies  to  !>,r>mhto  ;  as,  "  James,  your  father  has  come."  The 
name  of  the  person  addressed  must  always  be  of  the  second  person  ;  and  a  noun 
ia  this  situation,  when  it  has  no  verb  to  agree  with  it,  and  is  wholly  disconnected 
with  the  rest  of  the  sentence,  is  said  to  be  independent.     Hence, 

RUIiS    XVI. 

When  an  address  is  made,  the  name  of  the  person  or  thing 

addressed  is  in  the  nominative  case  independent. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

622,  ''John,  will  you  assist  me?'' 

John  is   a  proper  noun,  of  the  second  person,  singui.ar 

NUMBER,  M.'VSCULINE  GENDER,  and  NOMINATIVE  CASE  INDEPENDENT, 

according  to  Rule  XVI. 


(1.)  Apply  Rule  XV.        (2.)  Remark  2. 
(4.)   Who  is  put  in  apposition  with  he  by  Rule  XY. 

(».)  Whom  agrees  with  them,  by  Rule  XV.        (6.)  IRm  should  be  he  to  agree 
with  it,  according  to  Rule  XV.        (7.)  Apply  Rule  YI. 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  .      S9 

E?^ERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 
1. 

"'My    lords,    (1.)  the  time  lam  come  "  Rafus,  you  must  improve  jour  time.'* 

when  we  must  take  some  deci-  "  Geutlenicn   of  the  jury." 

give  measures."  "James,  (1.)  study  {2.)  your  book." 

"  iu  making  tliis   appeal   to  you,  my  "  Willium,   do   try  to  a;et  your  isssoa 
fellow-citizecs,  1  rely  entirely  ou  lo-duy."    fi 

your  cuudor." 

2. 

"Boys,  attend  to  your  lessons."  "  My  dear  children,  let  no  root  of  bit- 

"  Girls,  come  into  school."  terncbs  spring  up  among  you." 

**  Did  you  speak  to  me,  girls?" 

LVII.    OF    NOUNS  IN  THP^  CASE  ABSOLUTE. 

fi23.  Iu  the  phrase,  "The  sun  being  risen,  we  set  sail,"  the  first  clause  of 
the  sentence,  namely,  "The  sun  being  risen,"  has  notliing  to  do  with  th» 
remainder:  the  noun  and  participle  may^  therefore,  when  taken  together,  be  said 
to  be  in  the  nominative  case  independent ;  but  as  we  have  already  one  case  of 
this  nature,  we  will,  for  the  suke  of  making  a  distinction,  call  this  (the  noun 
joined  with  a  participle)  the  nominative  case  absolute.     lieuce, 

A  noun  or  pronoun  before  a  participle^   and  independent 
of  the    rest    of   the  sentence^  is  in  the  nominative  case 
absolute. 
f.2<t.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

'•The    sun    (S.)   being  risen,   {A,)   we  "  Wellingtpn  having  returned  to  Eug- 

departed."  laud,' tranquility   was  restored  ta 

"  Egypt   being   conquered,  Alexander  France." 

returned  to  .Syria."  "  Bonaparte  being  conquered,  the  king 

"  Shame    being    lost,    all    virtue   was  v*'as  restoi-ed." 

lost."  "The  conditions  being  observed,   th« 

■**  The  soldiers  retreating,  victory  was  bargain  was  a  mutual  benefit." 

lost." 

625.     SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED.  ' 

'  Him  (5.)  only  excepted,  wlio  v.'as  a  scholars  behaved  well." 

murderer."  "  Him  being  destroyed,  the  remaining 

''  Her  being  dismissed,  the  rest  of  the  robbers  made  their  escape."      * 


LVIII.  OF  THE  LNFLNITH^E  MOOD. 

Note  XII. — A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  is  sometimes 
placed  independently;  as,  "To  be  frank,  I  own  I  have 
injured  you." 

(1.)  Rule  XVI.  (2.)  Imperative  mood,  and  agrees  with  zJAow  or  ^'o-w  under- 
stood, by  Rule  VII. 

(3.)  In  the  nominative  case  absolute  with  heina  risen,  by  Rule  XVII. 

(4.)  Rule  XIII.  r.5.)  When  a  noun  is  iu  the  case  absolute,  it  should  be  ^* 

'Lhc  nominative  c?.ec.    IT.ri^  should  therefore  be  7w,  by  Rule  XYII. 

12 


00  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

626.  EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX. 

**  To  confess  the  truth,  I  was  in  fault."    "  To  tell  the  plaiu  truth,  I  persuaded 
*'  To  display  his  power,  he  oppressed  him  to  stay." 

his  soldiers."  "  To  convince  you,  I  will  continue  here 

till  you  return." 

"To  play  is  pleasant."  What  is  pleasant?  '*  To  play."  The  infinitive  to 
jplay  is,  then,  the  nominutivc  case  to  is.  "  Thou  shalt  not  kill,  is  required  of  all 
men."  What  is  required?  "  Thou  shalt  not  kill."  llXia  \i^vh  is  required,  then, 
agrees  with  "  Thou  shalt  not  kill,"  as  its  nominative.     Hence, 

62(3 — 1.  Note  XIII. — The  infinitive  mood,  or  part  of  a 
sentence,  is  frequently  put  as  the  nominative  ease  to  a 
verb  of  the  third  person  singular. 

627.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"To  excel  requires  much  exertion."  of  God." 

"  To  abandon  friends  will  sink  a  man's    "  Honor  thy  father  and  thy  mother,  is 

character."  required  ot  all  men." 

*'  To  practice  religion  is  our  duty."  "  To  write  a  fair  hand  requires  prac- 

"  Thou  shalt  not  kill,  is  the  command  tice." 

Hemark  1. —  To  excel  is  the  nominative  case  to  requires yhy  Note  7vIII.,  and 
requires  agrees  with  to  excel,  by  Rule  VII.  In  parsing,  "  Thou  shalt  not  kill,"  we 
first  apply  Rules  YI.,  VII.  and  IX.  The  whole  phrase  is  considered  the  nomina- 
tive to  is  required,  by  Note  XIII, 

2.  The  infinitive  mood,  or  a  part  of  a  sentence,  is  frequently  the  object  of  a 
transitive  verb;  as,  "Boys  love  to  play."  What  do  boys  love?  "  To  play." 
The  object  of  love,  then,  is  to  play.  "  Children  do  not  consider  how  much  has 
been  done  for  them  by  their  parents."  Consider  what?  "  Hoiu  much  has  been 
done  for  them  hy  their  imrents  f^  including  for  the  object  of  the  verb  the  whole 
phrase  in  italics. 

Note  XIV. — The  infinitive  mood  or  part  of  a  sentence^ 
maj'  have  an  adjective  or  participle  agreeing  with  it,  when 
there  is  wo  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood,  to  which 
the  adjective  may  belong. 

628.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

*'  To  see  the  sun  is  pleasant."  "  Defraud  not  thy  neighbor,  is  binding 

*'  To  ;)ractise  virtue  will  be  productive  on  all." 

of  happiness."  "To   do  good  to  our  enemies,  is  not 

*'  To  be  ridiculed  is  unpleasant."  natural  to  our  hearts." 

Eemarks. — Pleascutt  agrees  with,  "  to  see  the  sun,"  by  Note  XIY.  Binding 
agrees  with,  "Deiraud  not  thy  neighbor,"  by  the  same  authority.  To  is  apply 
Rule  VII. ;  to  sun.  Rule  VIII. ;  to  the  infinitive  to  see,  Note  XIII. 

629.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compose  one  or  more  sentences  having  an  infinitive  governed  by  a 
participle?  One,  using  an  infinitive  after  a  noun?  One,  describing  the  manner 
oi  pl<iying  hall?  One,  or  more,  on  the  manner  oi idayinq  taejl  One,  on  the 
duty  of  children  to  mind  their  parents?  One,  or  more,  on  industry  }  One,  on 
thebuslness  you  intend  to  pursue  for  liio? 


LIX. 

630.  In  the  phrase,  "  John  and  James  are  here,"  the  sense  is,  that  "John 
and  James  are  ^e^A  hi.i'o;"  two  persons  are  therefore  spoken  of,  which  rcndei^v 
it  necessary  to  use  the  plural  verb  a/r,-to  agree  with  two  nouns  which  individual!)- 
are  singular ;  hcuce, 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  91 

RUIiE   XYIIL 

Tlco  or  more  nouns  or  pronouns,  of  the  singular  number, 
connected  together  hy  and,  cither  expressed  or  understood, 
must  have  verbs,  nouns,  and  pronouns,  agreeing  with  them 
in  the  plural  numoer. 

CiJl.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  Willitim  and  James  run."  "John  and  Joseph  can  get  their  les- 

*'  Mary  and  Harriet  stud}',  and  they  will  sons.'' 

'therefore  excel."  "  Time  and  tide  wait  for  no  man." 

*'  You  and  I  are  in  fault."  "  Yi\  coat  and  pantaloons  were  made  by 

*'  John  and  Thomas  say  they  intend  to  V\''iasou.' 

study  Latin." 
Remarks. —  William  is  one  of  the  nominatives  to  the  verb  ricn.     James  is  in  the 
nominative  case  to  the  verb  ri///,  and  is  connected  with  the  noun    William,   by 
llule  XI,    A'un  agrees  with  William  and  James,  by  Rule  XVIII. 

Or.2.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  Mary  and  her  cousin  has  come."  '*  The  farmer  and  his  son  is  in  town." 

"You  and    I    makes  progress  in   our     "  Susan  and  her  sister  is  deceitful." 

studies."  "  WilUam  and  John  both  writes  a  good 

*'  Life  and  health  is  both  uncertain."  hand." 

Rema.rlcs. — For  //«.<>■  come,  we  shoulil  read  Jiavecovle,  that  the  verb  may  be  plural, 
when  it  has  two  nominatives  connected  by  and,  according  to  Rule  XVII I. 

.Exceptioji  1. — When  and  connects  two  or  more  ncuus  in  the  singular,  which 
refer  to  the  same  person  or  thing,  the  verb  must  be  singular;  as,  "  Pliny,  the  phi- 
losopher and  naturalist,  has  grtatly  enriched  science." 

6S3.      SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  Tiiat  superficial  scholar  and  critichave    "  In  that  house  Hva  a  great  and  distin- 
given   new  evidence   of  his   mis-  guished  scholar  and  staTesir.an." 

guided  judgment."  "Mr.  Cooper,   the  sailor  and   novelist, 

"  There  go  a  benevolent  man  and  schol-  visit  La  Eafayette,  the  patriot  and 

ar/'  philanthropist." 

Exception  2.— Vv^hen  two  or  more  nouus  in  the  singular,  connected  by  and,  have 

*'ac'7i  or  er<5;'y joined  with  them,  the  verb  must   be   in   the   singular  nir.nber;    as, 

*'  Every  person,  every  house,  and  every  blade  of  grass,  was  destroyed." 

'634.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"Every  man,  and  every  woman,  and    "  Each  man  and  each  woman,  were  par- 
every  child,  were  taken."  ticularly  alluded  to  in  the  report  of 

"  Every  tree,  stick  and  twig,  were  con-  the  afi'air." 

sunied." 
B.emarJc.—  'V/et'e,\nih(ifi.v?,i  of  these  examples,  should  be  changed  for  toa^, 
because  reference  is  had  to  each  person,  individual!}'  considered,  which,  in  respect 
to  the  verb,  is  the  same  in  effect  as  if  one  person  only  was  spoken  of. 

Note.  XV. — Every  's  sometimes  associated  with  a  plural, 
noun,  in  which  case  the  verb  must  be  singular;  as,  "Every 
hundred  years  constitutes  a  century.*' 

635.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"Every  twenty-four  hours  afford  to  us    "  Every  four  years  add  another  day  to 
the  vicissitudes  of  day  and  night.'  the  ordinary  number  of  days  in  a 

year." 
RemarJc. — AJford,  in  the  example  above,  is  a  violation  of  the  note  :  it  should 
be  ajfords,  in  the  singular  number.     The  reason  of  this  is,  that  "  every  twenty- 
four  hours,"  signifies  a  singleperiod  of  time,  and  is,  therefore,  in  reality  singular. 


§2  ENGLISH  GRAMMAPw. 

NoTs  XVI. — A  verb  in  the  plural  will  agree  Vvith  a  col- 
lective noun  in  the  singular,  when  a  part  only  of  the  indi- 
viduals are  meant  ;  as,  "The  council  were  divided  in  their 
sentiments."  When  the  noun  expresses  the  idea  of  unity, 
the  verb  should  be  singular  ;  as,  "  The  council  was  coiii- 
])0sed  wholly  of  iarmers." 

Eemarhs.—ln  the  foreiroing  example,  we  use  the  plural  v^vowere  divided,  be- 
cause we  refer  to  the  iudividuals  composing  the  council ;  but  if  no  ullutiion  of  this 
sort  had  been  made,  aud  we  had  spoken  o\  \\,  as  one  entire  body,  we  should  have 
used  the  sin<^ular  verb,  according  to  the  coLauiou  rule;  as,  "  Tlie  council  is  com- 
posed wholly  of  fiirmers." 

We  apply  to  council,  in  the  first  example.  Note  XVI. ;  to  were  divided,  the 
same  noie;  aud  to  council,  and  was  compo^^d  iu  the  second  exaa^ole  Rules  VI. 
aud  VXI. 

C36.  EXERCISES  IX  STKTAX. 

*'  The  council  were  divided  in  their  sen-     *'  Yij  people  do  not  consider." 

timents."  "  The  multitude  eagerly  pursue  pleasure 

"  A  part  of  the  men  were  murdered."  as  their  chief  good?' 

6G7.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND   CORRECTED. 

**  My  people  doth  liot  consider."  "  The  committee  was  divided  in   their 

"The   people    rejoices    in  that  which  sentiments,  and  has  referred  th« 

sijould  give  it  sorrow."  business  to  a  general  meeting." 

"The  multitude  rushes  to  certain  dcs- 

tructiot." 


633.  J^e^ative  means  denying  /  and  aff^rmaiive,  afssrtiyig  or  dcdan;irjiiofrdively . 
A  sentence  in  which  somethmg'i.s  denied  is  a  negative  one,  and  a  sentence  in 
which  something  is  aliirmed  or  positively  assertefd,  is  an  affirmative  one.  '*  Vice 
degrades  us,"  is  an  alHrmative  sentence,  and  "Labor  does  not  injure  us,"  is  :> 
negative  one.  ^Not,  not Hng,  none  at  all,  by  no  means y  no,  in  no  wise ,  neither ,  no, 
'p/jU'\  dbc,  are  negative  terms. 

The  phrase,  '•  I  have  nothing,"  has  one  negative,  and  means,  "I  have  not 
anything."  The  phrase,  "I  have  not  nothing,"  cannot  mean  the  same  as  "I 
have  nothinpji"  but  muf  t  mean,  on  the  contrary,  "  I  liave  something."  This  last, 
jou  perceive,  is  aa  afiirmative  sentence,  and  signifies  the  same  as  the  foregoing 
one,  "  I  hay-«  not  nothing."-  Two  negatives,  therefore,  are  equal  to  an  aiiirma- 
tive.     Hence, 

RULE   XIZ. 
Two  negatives  in  the  same  sentence,  are   equivalent  to  an 

offirmaiive. 

G.39.      SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  He  spends  all  the  day  in  idleness,  and    "Befl.)  honest,  nor  (2.)  take  (3.)  no 
X  cannot  prevail  on  him  to  do  shape  nor  semblance  of  disguise." 

nothing."  "  .   "  Ho  is  so  (4.)  indolent,  that  he  will  not 

"He    cannot    get  no   employment  in  do  nothing." 

town."  <'  I  did  not  say  nothing." 

(\.)  .Be  agrees  with  tJ'Oic  or  j/o?^ understood,  by  Rule  VII. 
(2.)  For  710?',  read  cW. 

(3. )  Ta^ce  is  in  the  imprit^?tive  mood,  apd  agrees  with  fho2/  or  yon  undcrstoofl, 
und  is  therefore  connected  to.  b'',  accoiding  to  Rule  XI. 
(4.)  Adverb. 


EXGLISH  GRAMMAP. 


93 


"  I  cannot  by  no  means  coaser>t/'  "Hccrinnot  do  nothing  acceptfible  lo 

"  I  shall  not  take  no  interfi:it  in  the  affair."  John." 

*■'  I  nevor  studied  no  grammar." 

Jiemccrt':.-— For  nothin<j,  in  the  above  esamplcs,.  read  anytldrtg,  in  accordauce 
vdth  Rule  XIX. 


640.  PKOMICUOUS  EXER 

"  Deep  rivers  move  vrith  silent  niajestj ; 

but  small  brooks  are  nois}-.  ' 
"Deeds    t\re    fruits;    words    are    but 

kaves." 
^"  It  is  a  bad  horse  indeed  that  will  net 

carry  his  own  provender." 
'"' The  hog  never  looks  up  to  him  who 

threshes  down  the  acorns." 
"  Add  not  trouble  to  the    grief-worn 

heart." 
"  If  the  council  be  good,  it  is  no  matter 

who  gives  it." 
"  By   oihcrs'  faults  wise  men   correct 

their  own." 
"  When  the  world  say.'' yon  are  vrise  and 

good,  osk  yourself  if  it  bo  trne." 
"Sin  and  inisery  are  constant  compan- 

ioris," 


CISES  IX  SYNTAX. 

"  Power  discovers  the    disposition   of 

man." 
"  Quarrels  are  easily  begun,  but  with 

diniculty  ended." 
"Force    without    forecast   is   of   little 

worth." 
"  Rome  was  not  built  in  one  day." 
"  In  youth  and  .strength  think  of  old  aga 

and  Weakness." 
"  All  are  not  saints  v/ho  go  to  chui'ch." 
"  To  ssy  well  is  good,  but  to  do  well  is 

better." 
"  Xo  fear  . "should   deter  us   from   doin;; 

c-ocd." 
"  Pride,  pcrcoivingKnmility  honorable, 

often  borrows  her  clo«k." 
"Say  v.hat    is  we)!,    but  do   what   i», 

better." 


r^l.  SKXTEXCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compose  one  sentence  describing  the  business  of  an  instructor  *  One. 
the  business  of  a  dod  r?  '  One,  the  business  of  a  laivyer  1  One,  of  a  dentist? 
One,  of  a  surcjeon  ?  One,  of  a  fai-nicr?  One,  of  a  llachmith  ?  One,  of  a.7ni'ler  f 
One!  of  a  marcliard  1  One,  of  "a  grccer  ?  One,  of  an  apctliecary  1  One,  of  a  Ug- 
idaiorl  OriC,  of  ».jvdaef  One,  of  a  coloiul?  One,  of  a  caj^iain?^  One,  of  a 
q£ueral  1    One,  of  an  agciii  in  a  factory  1    One,  of  the  dincfon  of  a  bank  ? 


LXI. 

642.  When  I  say,  "  lie  taught  me  grammar,"  I  mean,  "He  taught  grammar 
to  me :"  grariimar,  then,  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  and  r,ie  is  governed  by  the  pro- 
position  'to,  understood.  In  the  first  example,  we  have  tv/o  objective  cases  .^fter 
the  verb  taught  ;  and  since  there  are  many  instances  like  the  preceding,  in  wbieU 
transitive  verbs  are  followed  by  two  objective  cases — hence  the  following, 

RULE    XX. 

Tii'o  objective  cases,  the  one,  of  a  p"rsov,  and  the   other    of  a. 
thing,  may  foJloio  transitive  verbs,  of  asking,  teaching,  giv- 
i7ig,  (^c. ;  a  preposition  being  understood. 
"  He  taught  me  grammar."' 

Bemarh  l.~In  the  foregoing  example,  me  and  grammar  are  both  governed  by 
iayfht,  according  to  Rcle  XX. 

,   G4S.  EXAMPLES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  He  taught  me  gram.mar."  "My    instructor    gave   me  a   valnable 

"  William  asked  me  some  questions." 
"My  mother  wrote  me  a  precious  letter 

in  the  month  of  ilay." 
"  They  allowed  him  his  seal  in  Con- 

• '  gress." 
"  John  gave  mo  a  dei.iiled  account  ef 
th«  \Thol«  trausaetioa." 


book,  for  my  attention  to  study.' 
'She  forbade  him  the  presence  of  the 

emperor." 
'  The  French  denied  him  the  privilegt 

of  an  Amoricaa  citir.«u," 


94  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

LXII. 

044.  The  natural  construction  of  the  passive  voice  requires  the  object  of  the 
active  verb  to  become  the  nominative  to  the  passive  verb;  as,  "He  taught  me 
grammar;"  *'G-rammar  was  taught  me."  In  some  few  instances,  just  the  reverse 
lakes  place  ;  as,  "  1  v.as  taughc  grammar;"  here  the  object,  grammar,  is  placed 
afier  the  verb  :  we  therefore  ilerive  tlie  following, 

RULE  XSL 

An  ohjective  casp  viay  follow  'passive  verbs  of  asking,  teaching, 
and  some  others,  as,  "  I  was  taught  grammar." 

^^^  Apply  to  /Rule  YI.  ;  to  wofi  taught.  Rule  VII. ;  to  gra7nrnar,  Rule  XXI. 

e.45,  EXERCISES  IX  SYNTAX. 

"  John  taught  me  music."  "  I  was  taught  grammar." 

"  Music  was  taught  me  by  John."  "  Tne  presence  of  the  emperor  was  for- 

*'  A  question  was  asked  me."  hidden  Theresa." 

"Theresa  was  forbi'ldc-n  the  presence  of    "Reading  is  taught  in  almost  every 
the  emperor."  school." 


LXIII. 

646.  "When  I  sav,  "  lie  came  home  last  May,"  the  sense  i.'',  w^hen  fully  c:c- 
pressed  "  He  came  to  JtU  home  in  hast  May."  "  John  continued  four  years  at  the 
university ;"  that  is,  "  dvring  four  years." ""  The  horce  ran  a  mile  ;"  that  is,  "  over 
the  space^of  a  mile."  "John  went  that  way  ;"  that  is,  ^^  over  that  way."  From 
these  facis  we  derive  the  following, 

RULB  X5III. 
Home  and  nouns  signifiiing  which  way,  how  far,  how  lonij, 

or  time  v.^hen,  <^-c.,  are  in  the  chjective  case  ;  a  preposition 

being  understood. 

047.  EXERCISES  IN  SYXTxiX. 

"He  came  home  last  May."  "  Susan  ride.s  out  every  dav."       _ 

"John  continued  four  years  at  the'  uni-    "  Y'illiam  sleeps  coralurtably  all  nighV.' 
ver.sity."  "  -Tobn  was  absentfrom  home  six  years." 

"John  went  home  once  a  month."  "James  lived  six  years  at  Richmond, 

"  Charles  studies  six  hours  every  day."  twelve  years  at  Shreveport." 

"  John  rode  that  v/ay." 
"  He  ran  a  mile." 

Note  XVII. — After  the  w^ords  like  and  unlike,  the  prepo- 
sition to  or  unto  is  frequently  understood  ;  as,  "  He  is  like  his 
father  ;"  that  is,  " like  ^r;  his  father."     "She  is  unlike  her 
sister ;"  that  is,  "  unlike  to  her  sister." 
'     6-iS.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  He  is  like  his  brother."  "  John  behaves  like  a  man  in  a  violent 

"William  unlike  his  father,  falsified  his         ^V'^sK'  .,  .,„ 

^or(l»  "He  is  unlike  any  other  mortal." 

Note  XVIII. — Nouns  signifying  duration,  extension,  quan- 
tity, quality  or  vaiuation,  are  in  the  objective  case,  v.'ithout 
any  governing  v/ord.    The  following  are  examples : 


ENGLISH  GEAMMAE.  95 

"  The  AUantic  ocean  is  three  thousand  "The    cart    weighs    fifteen    hucdred 

miles  (1.)  wide."  pounds." 

"  WilUam's  kiiife  is    worth    eighteen  "  The  wail  which  separates  China  froui 

pence,  or  twenty-live  cents."  Tartarj,comnionly  called  the  Gre^ir, 

"  For  that  article,  which  is  richly  worth  Clnuese  Wall,   is  fifteen  hundr-^d 

a  dollar,  (2.)  we  cannot  always  get  miles    long,   and  Jrom   twenty   to 

fifty  cents."  thirty  feet  in  height." 
**  The  chasm  is  fifty  feet  hroad." 

Ee?narks.—{\.)   The  noun  y/uYti!  is  governed  according  to   Note   XVIII.     {2.^ 

Apply  Note  XVIII.  •"•■' 

Note  XIX. — The  conjunction  ^5,  after  such,  many  and 
same,  is  generally  considered  a  relative  pronoun  ;  as  in  the 
following  examples  : 

*'  He  receives  into   his  school  as  many     "  He  took  such  books  as  pleased  him." 
scholars  as  (1.)  apply."  "  He  exhibited  the  same  course  of  con- 

**  Our  instructor,  who  is   scrupulously  duct  as  was  once  before  exhibited 

exact  in  the  execution  ol  justice,  on  the  same  occasioa." 

punishes  severely  all  such  as  dis- 
obey his  commands." 
Remaylcs.—{1.)  As  is  a  conjunction,  used  here  as  a  relative,  accordino-  to  the 

Note  preceding;  of  the  third  person  plural,  masculine  gender,  agreeino- with 

scJtolars,  according  to  Rule  V. ;  and  in  the  nominative  case  to  apjjl^,  accoru^n'>-  to 

XCUIjK    V  J.. 

Note  XX.— The  conjunction  than  seems  to  have  the  force 
of  a  preposition  before  the  relative  ichom,  in  a  sentence 
where  a  comparison  is  made,  as  follows  : 

♦'  Which,  when   Beelzebub  perceived,      "  Alfred,  than  whom,  Solomon   excep- 
thau  whom  (1.)  Satan  (2.)  excep-  ted,  a  wiser  king   never  reigned 

ted,  (3. )  none  higher  sat."  was  one   of   the   earliest  Englibil 

kings." 
jRtuiar/:s.—(]..)  Whom  is  governed  by  the  conjunction  tJian,  Mscd  as  a  preposi- 
tion, according  to  Note  XX.— (2.)  Apply  Rule  XVII.— (8.)  Participle  agreeing 
with  iScUan,  by  Rule  Xlli.— It  is  somewhat  remarkable,  that  if,  in  the  last  twu 
examples,  the  personal  pronoun  he  were  substituted  for  w/i07k,  it  would  be'ia  the 
nominative  ca^e  ;  as,  "  A  wiser  king  never  reigned  than  he;"  that  is  "than, 
Ae  was." 

649.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WTtlTTEN. 

VTill  you  compose  a  sentence  having  a  proper  example  under  Ritf  T  9  Tr  o 
TIT.?  IV.?  v.?  VI.?  VII.?  VIII.>  tx.Y  X.?  XI. y  XII.?  XIII  ^  XIV  '^ 
XV.?   XVI.?  XVII.?  XVIII.  ?  XIX.?  XX.?  XXI.?  XXII.? 

Will  you  construct  a  sentence  descriptive  of  the  calamities  arisir^q  frmnnref 
one,  on  losses  Inj  sea  f  one,  on  X\\c  fatal  ejects  of  lljldning  ?  one,  on  tiie  character 
of  our forefathtrs?  ona,  on  each  of  the  seo.yons  !  one,  on  \he  ejf'ects  ( f  rain  "t  one 
<m  the  manner  of  making  hay  .'  one,  on  the  appearance  of  soldiirs  when  tfaininq  ) 
one,  on  the  celebration  of  Christmas  f  one,  on  the  utility  of  fire?  one  on  the  vtiiitT/ 
of  wood  /  one,  on  the  usefulness  of  the  cow  ?   one,  on  fruit  ?  ' 

LXIV.  OP  WORDS  USED  AS  DIFFERENT  PARTS  OP 

SPEECH. 

650.  That  is  a  relative, 

When  who  or  tvhich  may  be  substituted  for  it,  and  make  sense  •  as  "  The^i-n  in 
that  [who]  arrived  yesterday."  '    "'  "     ' 

051.  That  is  a  demonstrative  pronoun, 


!)6  EN(?LIS1I  GRAMMAR. 

"Whca  It  is  joiucd  with  a  noun  to  poiut  it  out;  as,   "  Thut  mtn  is  iulftlliijoBt.'* 

(55'J.  TiiAT  is  a  conjunction.. 

In  ail  cisiio  when  it  is  neither  a  relative  nor  a  demonstrative  pronoun;  «< 
*'  He  atuciied  liial  Lie  luu/  leuru.'' 

053.  But  is  a  pn^position, 

When  it  has  the  sense  of  except;  as,  "  All  but  [except-]  John  came." 
(554.  But  is  a  a  adctrb. 

When  it  has  the  sense  of  only  ;  as,  "  This  is  but  [only]  doing  our  duty." 
055.  But  is  a  conjunciion. 

In  all  cases  when  it  is  neither  an  adverb  nor  preposition  ;  i;s,  "  He  called,  bot 
I  rtfused  to  ;j;o." 

656.  As  is  a  relative, 

AVhen  it  follows  iaani/,  such  or  same  ;  as,  "  Let  such  as  hear  take  heed." 
657    As  is  an  adverb, 

When  it  is  joined  to  an  adverb  or  adjective  in  the  sense  of  so  ;  as,  "He  do«« 
as  well  as  he  can." 

058.  As  is  a  covjunctiGn, 

In  all  cases  except  when  it  is  an  adverb  or  relative;  as,  "  He  did  as  I  dirccttd 
him."  ^ 

651h  Either  if*  a  conjunction. 

When  it  corresponds  to  or  ;  as,   "  Either  the  one  or  the  other." 

GOO.  EiTiiCR  is  a  distrilmtiue  pronoun. 

When  it  means,  "  one  of  the  two  ;  as,  "  You  can  take  either  road." 

601.  Both  is  a  conjunction. 

When  it  is  followed  by  arid  ;  as,  "  Vv^c  assisted  him  both  for  his  sake  and  •«r 
own." 

662.  Both  is  an  adjective  pronoun. 

When  it  means,  "  the  two  ;"  as,  "  Both  the  men  arc  guilty." 
66o.   Yxi-i:  \^  ?i  conjunction, 

When  it  follows  though;  as,  "  Though  he  reproves  me,  yet  I  esteem  him."  I» 
all  other  cases,  it  is  an  adcerb  ;  as,   '•  Tiiat  event  has  yet  to  come." 

604.  ^<.^v.  is  a  conjunction, 

When  it  means  the  same  as  becaase  ;  as,  "  He  trusted  him,  for  he  knew  that 
he  would  not  deceive  him." 

605.  For  is  a  preposition, 

In  all  instances  except  when  it  is  a  conjunction  ;  as,  "  Ee  works  for  mc." 
^66.   What  is  a  compound  relative. 

When  it  stands  for,  "  that  which  ;"  "  1  will  take  what  [that  which]  you  8«nd 
me." 

G87.  AVhat  is  an  interrogative  relative  pronoun, 
When  used  in  asking  question.?;  as,   "  What  do  you  want  ?" 

66S.  What  is  an  adjective  pronoun. 

When  joined  with  a  noun ;  as,   "  What  strange  things  he  said  !" 

669.  What  is  a  compound  adjective  pronoun. 

When  joined  with  nouns,  and  has  the  sense  of  two  or  more  words  ;  as,  "  lo? 
what  manner  he  succeeded,  is  unknown  to  me  ;"  that  is,  "  The  manner  in  which 
he  succeeded,  is  unknown  to  me."' 

670.  What  is  an  interjection. 

When  used  to  express  wonder ;  as,   "  What .'  take  my  money  ?" 

(^7 J..  Then  is  a  conjunction, 

When  it  has  the  sense  of  j;Am^/b5'5  /  a?,  "if  he  has  eomrnandcd  it,  then  I 
must  obey." 

072.  Then  is  an  adverb^ 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR, 


91 


When  it  refers  to  time  ,  as,   "  Did  you  hear  it  thunder  then  ?" 

G73.  Much  is  a  noim, 

When  it  stands  for  quantity  ;  as,   "Where  much  is  given,  much  will  be   r«- 
quired." 

674.  Much  is  an  adjective. 

When  it  is  joined  to  nouns  ;  as,   "  Much  labor  fatigues  us." 

675.  Much  is  an  adverb, 

When  it  qualifies  the  same  parts  of  speech  that  the  adverb  does  ;  at,   "  Thou 
art  much  mightier  than  I." 

676.  More  is  a  7ZO?/72, 

When  it  implies  quantity;  us,   "  The  more  we  have,  the  more  we  want." 

()77.  More  and  most  are  adjectives, 

When  they  quahfy  a  noun  ;  as,   "The  more  joy  I  have,   the  more   sorrow   I 
expect ;"   "  Most  men  are  mistaken  in  their  pursuit  of  happiness." 

678.  More  and  most  are  adverbs, 

When  used  in  comparison ;  as,  "  This  boy  is  more  obedient  than  that ;"  •*  The 
soil  of  Cuba  is  most  lertile." 

679.  PROMISCUOUS  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 


"They  perfume  their  garments." 
"  A  perlame  is  a  sweet  odor." 
"  They  rise  early  in  the  morning." 
"  A  rise  sometimes  signiues  the  begin- 
ning." 
*'  Rufus  speaks  the  language  of  truth." 
"  James  performed  his  part  well." 
"  A  well  is  a  fountain  of  water." 
"  A  well  man  is  one  who  enjoys  his 

health."  ^ 

"  We  frequently  walk  in  the  garden." 
"  The  Jews  fast  often." 
"  He  walks  very  fast." 
"  The  refuse  signifies  the  worthless  re- 
mains." 
"  Desert  not  a  friend."  . 
"  Joseph's  brethren   came  and  bowed 

down  before  him." 
"  William  went  after  bis  slate." 


"  His  elder  brethren  came  before  Ben- 
jamin did." 

"  John  left  after  William  came." 

"  Evil  communications  corrupt  good 
manners." 

"  Corrupt  conversation  is  very  foolish." 

"  A  walk  in  the  fields  in  the  summer 
season  is  delightful." 

"  A  true  fast  is  abstaining  from  ini- 
quity." 

"  Sin  is  a  moral  evil,  and  the  cause  of 
natural  evils." 

"  Protest  not  rashly,  lest  thou  have  to 
repent  of  it:" 

"  A  protest  is  a  solemn  declaration 
against  a  thing." 

"  Do  nothing  rashly,  lest  thou  precipi- 
tate thyself  into  inextricable  diffi- 
culty." 

"  Hasty  promises  are  seldom  kept." 


The  man  that  I  saw  was  executed." ! 
That  man  that  you  met  yesterday  in 

the  street,  was  taken  and  sent  to 

Richmond,  that  he  might  have  an 

impartial  trial." 
We  assisted  him  both  for  your  sake 

and  our  own." 
Both  the  men  are  guilty." 
Although    he    reproves     me,    yet    I 

esteem  him." 
All  but  John  came." 
This  is  but  doing  our  duty." 
He  called  me,  but  I  refused  to  go." 
Let  such  as  hear  take  heed." 
'You  may  take  either  the  one  or  the 

other." 
•  Either  road  will  conduct  you  to  the 

rjpht  plaoe." 


"  Did  you  hear  the  report  of  the  caa- 

non  then?" 
"  Where  much  is  given,  much  will  be 

required." 
"  Future  time  is  yet  to  come." 
"  He  trusted  him,  for  he  knew  that  he 

would  not  deceive  him." 
"  He  works  for  me." 
"  He  refused  what  was  sent  him." 
"  What  strange  things  he  saw." 
"  In  v/hat  manner  he  succeeded  is  un- 
known to  me." 
"  What !  will  you  take  my  life  ?" 
"  The    more    we    have,  the  more   we 

want." 
"  The  more  joy  I  have,  the  more  sor- 
row I  expect." 
"  The  most  dutiful  children    r.re   the 
happiest  children." 


r^  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

3. 

"Susan  is  determined  to  learn,"  "  Virtue  and  vice  are  opposiles." 

''By  framing  excuses  he  prolonged  hia  "  When  John's  father  asked  him  that 
fetay."  question,   lie   heai-d   iiini,   but  r»- 

"  The  mail  who  is  faithfully  attached  to  fused  to  answer  him." 

reiiuion   may  be  relied  on   with  "  The  wall  is  sixty  feet  high." 

confidence."  "To  meet  our  friends  after  a  long  ab- 

'*  James,  do  visit  me,"  seuce  afibrds  us  much  joy," 


-O 


LXV.  COiNTRACTlONS. 

680.  Of  the  Auxillanj  Havi:,  also  of  Had. 

"  They've  forsaken  him."  "  I've  satisfied  myself." 

"  I'd  gone  when  you  came."  "  They'd  determined  to  let  him  go." 

*'  They'd  just  returaed  from  town." 

681.  Of  WiLL  and  Would. 

"1*11  finish  my  wark  first."  "  lie  is  still  determined  that  he'll  not 

"They'd  sing  songs  till   midnight,   if  forbear." 

th?y  were  urged."  "  He'll  at  last  mind  me." 

082.  Of  Am  and  Is. 

"  That  man's  rich."  your  time." 

"  'Tis  true  she's  dead."  "  'Tis  strange  that  she  will  not  regard 

"I'm   sorry  that  you   have  misspent  the  kind  a.ssistance  of  her  friend." 

033.  Of  Cannot  and  Will  not. 

"He  can't  endure   sucli  afBictions"       "  Re  v/on't  disobey  me." 

"You  cau't  be  absent  at  such  times"        "You   won't    mistake  the  direction." 

684.     Omission  of  the  Principal  Verb  after  an  Inter- 
rogative  Sentence. 

"  Whowiil  assist  me?"  "John"  [will  "  Whot  will  make  me  respectable  and 
assist  me].  -  happy  V"     "  Virtue." 

"What  sent  our  forefathers  to  this  "Who  i aught  bim  grammar?"  "Mr. 
country?"  "  The  love  of  liberty."  Williams." 

085.   Omissions  of  the  Privcipal  Verb  after  an  Auxiliary. 

"Stephen     will     go     if    John    will"  "  He  received  me  in  the  same  manner 

[go].                                               .  that  I  would  3'ou." 

"  Susan    !~hall  walk,    but   John    shall  "  I  will  do  it  as   soon   as  I  can." 

iiol."  "  The  work  is  not  completed,  but  soon 

"I  have  recited  ;  have  you?"  will  be." 

680.   Oniissiovs  of  the  Principal  Verb  after  Than  and  As. 

"Thomas    is    a    better    scholar    than  "  Johnson  is  richer  than  James." 

William"  [isj.  "  Susan  is  not  so  beautiful  as  Mary." 

"lie  \vas  m  )re  bjloved  than  Cynthia,  "  She  is  more  playful  than  her  brother." 
but  not  so  much  admired" 

687.  Omissions  of  the   Verb  To  be. 

"Sweet  iho  pleasure,  rich  the  treasure."  "Delightful  task,  to   rear  the  tender 
"A  child  of  freedom  thou."  thought." 

"Sweet  the  music  of  birds."  "To    teach    the    young   idea  how    t« 
"Deay  the  schoolboy's  sport.*'  sboot." 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  90 

688.  Omissions  of  May,  Might,  Could,  Would,  and  Should. 

"  Live  Ion 2:  and  be  happy."  "  He  might  not  weep,  nor  laugh,  ncr 

"Who   will   entreat  the  Lord  that  he  sintf." 

spiire  our  lives?"  "Should  I  forgive  you,  and  allow  you 

"I    could   nut  think,  nor  speak,   nor  to  depart,  you  would  not  reform." 

Lear." 

689.  0/nissions  of  the   Conjunction  before  the    Verb  in  the 

Subjimc/ive    Mcod. 

**  If  he  will  repent  and  reform,  I  will  "  Had  I  imgvoVed  my  time  as  I  onght 

a'^si.st.  him."  to  have  clone,  1  should  have  been 

''  Unless   giiod   order   bo  restored,  and  well  qualiiied    for   bns;iness." 

the  lor  ucroinccrs  be  re-elected,  "Were   Ihoro  no  alternative,   I   would 

thi'To   will    be    a"    end    to    the  not  do  thai." 

adiiiinibtration  of  justice." 

699.    G missions  of  For  afler    Ve.rh^  implying  the  idea   of 

sei^virig. 

"Make  me  a  pen."  "  Bring  me  some  wafer." 

"  Order  me  a  carriage."  "  Purchase  him  a  knife." 

691.  Omissions  of  the  Intfrjection. 

"Sweet  child  !  lovely  child!  thy  parents  "Thou    Fresever   ar.d   Creator    of  all 

are  lio  moic."  mankinfl." 

"Sweet,   blossom!    precious     to     my  "My   beloved   Ulrica!  hast  thou,  too, 

heart."  forgotten  me  V" 

692.  Omissions  of  the  Relative. 

"Several    men   arc  there,  come    from    "I  trust  that  he   I  desire   to  ^ee  so 
Europe,"  much,  will  speedily  return." 


LXVI.  INVERTED  SENTENCES. 
693.      The  Nominfftiue  Case  ph/ced  after  the   Verb. 

"Smack  went  the  whip,  round  went  for^ his  learning  and  politeness." 

the  wheels  ;  "  And  in  soft-ringlels  waved  her  golden 
Were  ever  folks  st  glad'r"  hair.'' 

"There  goes  a  man  tilikc  distinguished 

694.  The   Oljective   Case  before  the   Verb. 

"  Tyrants  no  more  their  savage  nature  "Me    glory    summons  to  the  martial 
kept,  scene." 

And  foes  to   virtue    wondered,  how  "  The  rolls  of  fame  I  will  not  now  cx- 
they  wept "  p'.oro." 

695.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN 

X. 

the> 

One, 

^ae,  on  cowardice  /   One,  onjillal  duty  i    One,  on  indoknce  I    One,  Wiclmlifi 


100  ENGLISH  GRAxMMAR. 

086.  SENTENCES  TRANSPOSED. 

"  Here  rests  his  head  upon  the  lap  of  earth, 
A  youth,  to  fortune  and  to  fame  unknown." 

Transposed. 

"  A  youth,  unknown  to  fortune  and  to  fame,  rests  here  his  head  upon  the  Up 
of  earth." 

"  When,  young,  life'sjourney  I  began, 

The  glittering  prospect  charmed  my  eyes; 
I  saw  along  the  extended  plain, 

Joy  after  joy  successive  rise  : 
But  soon  I  found  't  was  all  a  dream, 

And  learned  the  fond  pursuit  to  shun, 
Where  few  can  reach  the  purposed  aim. 

And  thousands  daily  are  undone." 

Transposed. 

.  "  I  began  life's  journey  when  young,  and  the  glittering  prospect  charmed  my 
eyes;  I  saw  joy  after  joy  successive  rise,  along  the  extended  plain:  but  soon  I 
found  it  was  all  a  dream';  and  learned  to  shun  the  fond  ])ursuit,  where  few  can 
reach  the  purposed  aim,  and  thousands  are  dailj'  undone." 

"  Needful  austerities  our  wills  restrain, 
»  As  thorns  fence  in  the  tender  plant  from  harm." 

Transposed. 

"Z^'^eedful  austerities  restrain  our  wills,  as  thorns  fonce  in  the  tender  plant  from 
harm." 

"  On  some  fond  breast  the  parting  soul  relies. 
Some  pious  drops  the  closing  eye  requires; 
E'en  from  the  tomb  the  voice  of  nature  cries. 
E'en  in  our  ashes  live  their  wonted  fires." 

Transposed, 

"  The  parting  soul  relies  on  some  fond  breast ;  the  closing  eye  requires  somt 
pious  drops  ;  the  voice  of  nature  cries,  even  from  the  tomb ;  and  their  wonted 
nres  live  even  in  our  ashes." 

"  From  lofty  themes,  from  thoughts  that  soared  on  high 
And  opened  wondrous  scenes  above  the  sky. 
My  Muse!  descend;  indulge  my  fond  desire; 
With  softer  thoughts  my  melting  soul  inspire. 
And  smooth  my  numbers  to  a  female's  praise; 
A  partial  v/orld  will  listen  to  my  lays. 
While  Anna  reigns,  and  sets  a  female  name 
Unrivalled  in  the  glorious  lists  of  fame." 

Transposed. 

"  0  my  Muse !  descend  thou  from  lofty  themes,  and  from  thoughts  that  soared 
on  high,  and  opened  wondrous  scenes  above  the  sky;  indulge  thou  my  fond  de- 
sire ;  and  do  thou  inspire  ray  melting  soul  with  softer  thoughts,  and  smooth  my 
Burubersto  a  female's  praise;  a  nartial  world  will  listen  to  my  lays,  while  Aiiaa 
reigns,  and  sets  a  fcTnale  name  unrivalled  in  the  glorious  lists  of  fame. 


^;^',>    ir--^ 


1 


